Part Number Hot Search : 
AK4673 HT66F60A AN801 TIP125 MAC4M 15SMC56A LRS1383C TKP39A
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download TMP86FS23UG Datasheet File

  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
 
 


  Datasheet File OCR Text:
 8 Bit Microcontroller
TLCS-870/C Series
TMP86FS23UG
TMP86FS23UG
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023 _ D TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A The Toshiba products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These Toshiba products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunction or failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of Toshiba products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C The products described in this document may include products subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_F For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
(c) 2006 TOSHIBA CORPORATION All Rights Reserved
Page 2
Revision History
Date 2005/9/12 2005/12/8 2006/8/28 Revision 1 2 3 First Release Contents Revised Contents Revised
Table of Contents
TMP86FS23UG
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 4 5
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Memory Address Map............................................................................................................................... 9 Program Memory (Flash) .......................................................................................................................... 9 Data Memory (RAM) ................................................................................................................................. 9 Clock Generator...................................................................................................................................... 10 Timing Generator .................................................................................................................................... 12 Operation Mode Control Circuit .............................................................................................................. 13
Single-clock mode Dual-clock mode STOP mode Configuration of timing generator Machine cycle
2.2
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3
System Clock Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.2.1 2.2.2.2 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.3.3 2.2.4.1 2.2.4.2 2.2.4.3 2.2.4.4
2.2.4
Operating Mode Control ......................................................................................................................... 18
STOP mode IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0) SLOW mode
2.3
Reset Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
External Reset Input ............................................................................................................................... 31 Address trap reset .................................................................................................................................. 32 Watchdog timer reset.............................................................................................................................. 32 System clock reset.................................................................................................................................. 32
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.1 3.2 Interrupt latches (IL19 to IL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Interrupt enable register (EIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF) .......................................................................................................... 36 Individual interrupt enable flags (EF19 to EF4) ...................................................................................... 37
Note 3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 3.3 Interrupt Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.4.1 3.4.2 Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows........................................................................ 39 Saving/restoring general-purpose registers ............................................................................................ 40 Interrupt return ........................................................................................................................................ 41
Using PUSH and POP instructions Using data transfer instructions 3.3.2.1 3.3.2.2
3.2.1 3.2.2
3.4
Software Interrupt (INTSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Address error detection .......................................................................................................................... 42 Debugging .............................................................................................................................................. 42
i
3.5 3.6 3.7
Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 External Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 4.2 SFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 DBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5. I/O Ports
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 Port P1 (P17 to P10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P2 (P22 to P20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P3 (P37 to P30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P5 (P57 to P50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P6 (P67 to P60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P7 (P77 to P70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P8 (P87 to P80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 54 55 57 59 62 64
6. Time Base Timer (TBT)
6.1 Time Base Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 67 Control .................................................................................................................................................... 67 Function .................................................................................................................................................. 68 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 69 Control .................................................................................................................................................... 69 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.2.1 6.2.2
6.2
Divider Output (DVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
7.1 7.2 Watchdog Timer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Watchdog Timer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer ................................................................... Watchdog Timer Enable ......................................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Disable ........................................................................................................................ Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)...................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Reset ........................................................................................................................... Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS) ................................................................................ Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT) .................................................................................. Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)....................................................................................................... Address Trap Reset ................................................................................................................................ 72 73 74 74 75
7.3
7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5
Address Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
76 76 76 77
7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.1 8.2 8.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ii
8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4
Timer mode............................................................................................................................................. 83 Event Counter mode ............................................................................................................................... 84 Pulse Width Measurement mode............................................................................................................ 85 Frequency Measurement mode .............................................................................................................. 86
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 9.2 9.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) ................................................................................................................ 95 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4) ........................................................................................................ 96 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)..................................................................... 96 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4).................................................................. 99 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................................................................................ 101 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4) .............................................................................................. 102 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)........................................................ 102 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................. 105 Warm-Up Counter Mode....................................................................................................................... 107
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1) High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 9.3.6 9.3.7 9.3.8 9.3.9
9.3.9.1 9.3.9.2
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 10.2 10.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) ............................................................................................................ 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5, 6) .................................................................................................... 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC5, 6)................................................................. 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5, 6).............................................................. 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) .......................................................................................................... 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5 and 6) ............................................................................................ 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)...................................................... 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6) ........................................... Warm-Up Counter Mode.....................................................................................................................
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1) High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7 10.3.8 10.3.9
115 116 116 119 121 122 122 125 127
10.3.9.1 10.3.9.2
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sampling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP Bit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit/Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Transmit Operation .................................................................................................................... 134 Data Receive Operation ..................................................................................................................... 134
129 130 132 133 133 134 134 134
11.8.1 11.8.2
Status Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
iii
11.9.1 11.9.2 11.9.3 11.9.4 11.9.5 11.9.6
Parity Error.......................................................................................................................................... Framing Error...................................................................................................................................... Overrun Error ...................................................................................................................................... Receive Data Buffer Full..................................................................................................................... Transmit Data Buffer Empty ............................................................................................................... Transmit End Flag ..............................................................................................................................
135 135 135 136 136 137
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.1 12.2 12.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Serial clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Clock source ....................................................................................................................................... 141 Shift edge............................................................................................................................................ 143
Leading edge Trailing edge Internal clock External clock 12.3.1.1 12.3.1.2 12.3.2.1 12.3.2.2
12.3.1 12.3.2
12.4 12.5 12.6
Number of bits to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Number of words to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes ............................................................................................................. 144 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes ............................................................................................................. 146 8-bit transfer / receive mode ............................................................................................................... 147
12.6.1 12.6.2 12.6.3
13. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
13.1 13.2 13.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Register configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Software Start Mode ........................................................................................................................... 153 Repeat Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 153 Register Setting ................................................................................................................................ 154
13.4 13.5 13.6
13.3.1 13.3.2 13.3.3
STOP/SLOW Modes during AD Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Precautions about AD Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Restrictions for AD Conversion interrupt (INTADC) usage ................................................................. Analog input pin voltage range ........................................................................................................... Analog input shared pins .................................................................................................................... Noise Countermeasure ....................................................................................................................... 157 157 157 157
13.6.1 13.6.2 13.6.3 13.6.4
14. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
14.1 14.2 14.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
15. LCD Driver
15.1 15.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
LCD driving methods .......................................................................................................................... 163 Frame frequency................................................................................................................................. 164
15.2.1 15.2.2
iv
15.3 15.4
15.2.3 15.2.4
LCD Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Control Method of LCD Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Initial setting ........................................................................................................................................ 167 Store of display data ........................................................................................................................... 167 Example of LCD driver output............................................................................................................. 169 Display data setting ............................................................................................................................ 166 Blanking .............................................................................................................................................. 166
LCD drive voltage ............................................................................................................................... 165 Adjusting the LCD panel drive capability ............................................................................................ 165
15.3.1 15.3.2
15.4.1 15.4.2 15.4.3
16. Real-Time Clock
16.1 16.2 16.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Control of the RTC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
17. Multiply-Accumulate (MAC) Unit
17.1 17.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Command Register ............................................................................................................................. Status Register ................................................................................................................................... Multiplier data Register ....................................................................................................................... Multiplicand data Register .................................................................................................................. Result Register ................................................................................................................................... Addend Register ................................................................................................................................. 177 178 178 178 178 178
17.3 17.4
17.2.1 17.2.2 17.2.3 17.2.4 17.2.5 17.2.6
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
EMAC ................................................................................................................................................. 180 CMOD ................................................................................................................................................. 180 RCLR .................................................................................................................................................. 180
17.5
17.4.1 17.4.2 17.4.3
Arithmetic Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Unsigned Multiply Mode ..................................................................................................................... Signed Multiply Mode ......................................................................................................................... Unsigned Multiply-Accumulate Mode ................................................................................................. Signed Multiply-Accumulate Mode ..................................................................................................... Valid Numerical Ranges ..................................................................................................................... 181 181 181 182 182
17.6
17.5.1 17.5.2 17.5.3 17.5.4 17.5.5 17.6.1 17.6.2 17.6.3 17.6.4 17.6.5
Status Flags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Operation Status Flag (CALC) ............................................................................................................ Overflow Flag (OVRF) ........................................................................................................................ Carry Flag (CARF) .............................................................................................................................. Sign Flag (SIGN) ................................................................................................................................ Zero Flag (ZERF)................................................................................................................................ 183 183 183 183 183
17.7
Example of Software Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
18. Flash Memory
18.1 Flash Memory Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Flash Memory Command Sequence Execution Control (FLSCR) ..................................... 186 Flash Memory Bank Select Control (FLSCR) ................................................................ 186 Flash Memory Standby Control (FLSSTB) ............................................................................ 187 18.1.1 18.1.2 18.1.3 18.2.1 18.2.2 18.2.3
18.2
Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Byte Program ...................................................................................................................................... 188 Sector Erase (4-kbyte Erase) ............................................................................................................. 188 Chip Erase (All Erase) ........................................................................................................................ 189
v
18.3 18.4
18.2.4 18.2.5 18.2.6
Toggle Bit (D6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Access to the Flash Memory Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Flash Memory Control in the Serial PROM Mode............................................................................... 191 Flash Memory Control in the MCU mode............................................................................................ 193
How to write to the flash memory by executing a user write control program in the RAM area (in the MCU mode) How to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the RAM area (in the RAM loader mode within the serial PROM mode)
Product ID Entry ................................................................................................................................. 189 Product ID Exit .................................................................................................................................... 189 Read Protect ....................................................................................................................................... 189
18.4.1 18.4.2
18.4.1.1
18.4.2.1
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.1 19.2 19.3 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Memory Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Serial PROM Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Serial PROM Mode Control Pins ........................................................................................................ Pin Function........................................................................................................................................ Example Connection for On-Board Writing......................................................................................... Activating the Serial PROM Mode ...................................................................................................... 196 196 197 198
19.4 19.5 19.6
19.3.1 19.3.2 19.3.3 19.3.4
Interface Specifications for UART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Operation Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Operation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Flash Memory Erasing Mode (Operating command: F0H) ................................................................. Flash Memory Writing Mode (Operation command: 30H) .................................................................. RAM Loader Mode (Operation Command: 60H) ................................................................................ Flash Memory SUM Output Mode (Operation Command: 90H) ......................................................... Product ID Code Output Mode (Operation Command: C0H).............................................................. Flash Memory Status Output Mode (Operation Command: C3H) ...................................................... Flash Memory Read Protection Setting Mode (Operation Command: FAH) ...................................... 203 205 208 210 211 213 214
19.7 19.8
19.6.1 19.6.2 19.6.3 19.6.4 19.6.5 19.6.6 19.6.7
Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Checksum (SUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Calculation Method ............................................................................................................................. 216 Calculation data .................................................................................................................................. 217
19.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 19.10 Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
19.10.1 19.10.2 19.10.3 Password String................................................................................................................................ 219 Handling of Password Error .............................................................................................................. 219 Password Management during Program Development .................................................................... 219
19.8.1 19.8.2
19.11 19.12 19.13 19.14 19.15 19.16
Product ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash Memory Status Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Erasure Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Input Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UART Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
220 220 222 222 224 225
20. Input/Output Circuitry
20.1 20.2 Control Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Input/Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
21. Electrical Characteristics
21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
vi
21.2
Recommended Operating Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
When Programming Flash memory in MCU mode ............................................................................. 230 When Not Programming Flash Memory in MCU Mode....................................................................... 230 Serial PROM mode ............................................................................................................................. 231
21.3 21.4 21.5 21.6 21.7 21.8 21.9
21.2.1 21.2.2 21.2.3
DC Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AD Conversion Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timer Counter 1 input (ECIN) Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write/Retention Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 235
232 234 235 235 235
21.7.1
Recommended Oscillating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Handling Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
22. Package Dimension
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI).
vii
viii
TMP86FS23UG
CMOS 8-Bit Microcontroller
TMP86FS23UG
The TMP86FS23UG is a single-chip 8-bit high-speed and high-functionality microcomputer incorporating 61440 bytes of Flash Memory. It is pin-compatible with the TMP86CM23/CP23AUG (Mask ROM version). The TMP86FS23UG can realize operations equivalent to those of the TMP86CM23/CP23AUG by programming the onchip Flash Memory.
Product No. TMP86FS23UG ROM (FLASH) 61440 bytes RAM 2048 bytes Package P-LQFP64-1010-0.50D MASK ROM MCU TMP86CM23/CP23AUG Emulation Chip TMP86C923XB
1.1 Features
1. 8-bit single chip microcomputer TLCS-870/C series - Instruction execution time : 0.25 s (at 16 MHz) 122 s (at 32.768 kHz) - 132 types & 731 basic instructions 2. 20interrupt sources (External : 5 Internal : 15) 3. Input / Output ports (I/O : 48 pins Output : 3 pins) Large current output: 5pins (Typ. 20mA), LED direct drive 4. Prescaler - Time base timer - Divider output function 5. Watchdog Timer 6. 18-bit Timer/Counter : 1ch - Timer Mode - Event Counter Mode - Pulse Width Measurement Mode - Frequency Measurement Mode
This product uses the Super Flash technology under the licence of Silicon Storage Technology, Inc. Super Flash is registered trademark of Silicon Storage Technology, Inc.
060116EBP
* The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023_D * TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A * The TOSHIBA products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These TOSHIBA products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunctionor failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of TOSHIBA products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B * The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q * The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of TOSHIBA or others. 021023_C * The products described in this document are subject to the foreign exchange and foreign trade laws. 021023_E * For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
Page 1
1.1 Features
TMP86FS23UG
7. 8-bit timer counter : 4 ch - Timer, Event counter, Programmable divider output (PDO), Pulse width modulation (PWM) output, Programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes 8. 8-bit UART : 1 ch 9. 8-bit SIO: 1 ch 10. 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter - Analog input: 8 ch 11. Key-on wakeup : 4 ch 12. LCD driver/controller - LCD direct drive capability (MAX 32 seg x 4 com) - 1/4,1/3,1/2duties or static drive are programmably selectable 13. Multiply accumulate unit (MAC) - Multiply or MAC mode are selectable - Signed or unsigned operation are selectable 14. Clock operation Single clock mode Dual clock mode 15. Low power consumption operation STOP mode: Oscillation stops. (Battery/Capacitor back-up.) SLOW1 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock stop.) SLOW2 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock oscillate.) IDLE0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR. IDLE1 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by interruputs(CPU restarts). IDLE2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. Release by interruputs. (CPU restarts). SLEEP0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using low frequency clock.Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR. SLEEP1 mode: CPU stops, and peripherals operate using low frequency clock. Release by interruput.(CPU restarts). SLEEP2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. interruput. 16. Wide operation voltage:
3.5 V to 5.5 V at 16MHz /32.768 kHz 2.7 V to 5.5 V at 8 MHz /32.768 kHz
Release by
Page 2
TMP86FS23UG
1.2 Pin Assignment
VSS XIN XOUT TEST VDD (XTIN) P21 (XTOUT) P22
RESET
Figure 1-1 Pin Assignment
Page 3
(INT5/STOP) P20 AVDD VAREF (AIN0) P60 (ECIN/AIN1) P61 (ECNT/AIN2) P62 (INT0/AIN3) P63 (STOP2/AIN4) P64
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
(SEG2) P85 (SEG1) P86 (SEG0) P87 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 VLC (TC4/SI) P30 (TC3/SO) P31 (SCK) P32 (TC6/PDO6/PWM6/PPG6) P33 (TC5/PDO5/PWM5) P34 (PDO4/PWM4/PPG4) P35 (PDO3/PWM3) P36 (DVO) P37
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
P84 (SEG3) P83 (SEG4) P82 (SEG5) P81 (SEG6) P80 (SEG7) P77 (SEG8) P76 (SEG9) P75 (SEG10) P74 (SEG11) P73 (SEG12) P72 (SEG13) P71 (SEG14) P70 (SEG15) P57 (SEG16) P56 (SEG17) P55 (SEG18)
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
P54(SEG19) P53(SEG20) P52(SEG21) P51(SEG22) P50(SEG23) P17(SEG24) P16(SEG25) P15(SEG26) P14(SEG27/INT3) P13(SEG28/INT2) P12(SEG29/INT1) P11(SEG30/TXD) P10(SEG31/RXD/BOOT) P67(AIN7/STOP5) P66(AIN6/STOP4) P65(AIN5/STOP3)
1.3 Block Diagram
TMP86FS23UG
1.3 Block Diagram
Figure 1-2 Block Diagram
Page 4
TMP86FS23UG
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
The TMP86FS23UG has MCU mode, parallel PROM mode, and serial PROM mode. Table 1-1 shows the pin functions in MCU mode. The serial PROM mode is explained later in a separate chapter. Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(1/3)
Pin Name P17 SEG24 P16 SEG25 P15 SEG26 P14 SEG27 INT3 P13 SEG28 INT2 P12 SEG29 INT1 P11 SEG30 TXD P10 SEG31 RXD P22 XTOUT Pin Number 27 Input/Output IO O IO O IO O IO O I IO O I IO O I IO O O IO O I IO O PORT17 LCD segment output 24 PORT16 LCD segment output 25 PORT15 LCD segment output 26 PORT14 LCD segment output 27 External interrupt 3 input PORT13 LCD segment output 28 External interrupt 2 input PORT12 LCD segment output 29 External interrupt 1 input PORT11 LCD segment output 30 UART data output PORT10 LCD segment output 31 UART data input PORT22 Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external clock PORT21 Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external clock PORT20 STOP mode release signal input External interrupt 5 input PORT37 Divider Output PORT36 PDO3/PWM3 output PORT35 PDO4/PWM4/PPG4 output PORT34 PDO5/PWM5 output TC5 input PORT33 PDO6/PWM6/PPG6 output TC6 input PORT32 Serial Clock I/O Functions
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
7
P21 XTIN P20
STOP INT5
6
IO I IO I I O O O O O O IO O I IO O I IO IO
9
P37
DVO
64
P36
PDO3/PWM3
63
P35
PDO4/PWM4/PPG4
62
P34
PDO5/PWM5
61
TC5 P33
PDO6/PWM6/PPG6
60
TC6 P32
SCK
59
Page 5
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86FS23UG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(2/3)
Pin Name P31 SO TC3 P30 SI TC4 P57 SEG16 P56 SEG17 P55 SEG18 P54 SEG19 P53 SEG20 P52 SEG21 P51 SEG22 P50 SEG23 P67 AIN7 STOP5 P66 AIN6 STOP4 P65 AIN5 STOP3 P64 AIN4 STOP2 P63 AIN3
INT0
Pin Number
Input/Output IO O I IO I I IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I IO O IO O PORT31 Serial Data Output TC3 input PORT30 Serial Data Input TC4 input PORT57 LCD segment output 16 PORT56 LCD segment output 17 PORT55 LCD segment output 18 PORT54 LCD segment output 19 PORT53 LCD segment output 20 PORT52 LCD segment output 21 PORT51 LCD segment output 22 PORT50 LCD segment output 23 PORT67 Analog Input7 STOP5 input PORT66 Analog Input6 STOP4 input PORT65 Analog Input5 STOP3 input PORT64 Analog Input4 STOP2 input PORT63 Analog Input3 External interrupt 0 input PORT62 Analog Input2 ECNT input PORT61 Analog Input1 ECIN input PORT60 Analog Input0 PORT77 LCD segment output 8 PORT76 LCD segment output 9
Functions
58
57
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
19
18
17
16
15
P62 AIN2 ECNT P61 AIN1 ECIN P60 AIN0 P77 SEG8 P76 SEG9
14
13
12
43
42
Page 6
TMP86FS23UG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(3/3)
Pin Name P75 SEG10 P74 SEG11 P73 SEG12 P72 SEG13 P71 SEG14 P70 SEG15 P87 SEG0 P86 SEG1 P85 SEG2 P84 SEG3 P83 SEG4 P82 SEG5 P81 SEG6 P80 SEG7 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 XIN XOUT
RESET
Pin Number 41
Input/Output IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O O O O O I O I I I I I I PORT75 LCD segment output 10 PORT74 LCD segment output 11 PORT73 LCD segment output 12 PORT72 LCD segment output 13 PORT71 LCD segment output 14 PORT70 LCD segment output 15 PORT87 LCD segment output 0 PORT86 LCD segment output 1 PORT85 LCD segment output 2 PORT84 LCD segment output 3 PORT83 LCD segment output 4 PORT82 LCD segment output 5 PORT81 LCD segment output 6 PORT80 LCD segment output 7 LCD common output 3 LCD common output 2 LCD common output 1 LCD common output 0
Functions
40
39
38
37
36
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44 52 53 54 55 2 3 8 4 11 10 5 1
Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Reset signal Test pin for out-going test. Normally, be fixed to low. Analog Base Voltage Input Pin for A/D Conversion Analog Power Supply +5V 0(GND)
TEST VAREF AVDD VDD VSS
Page 7
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86FS23UG
Page 8
TMP86FS23UG
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions
The CPU core consists of a CPU, a system clock controller, and an interrupt controller. This section provides a description of the CPU core, the program memory, the data memory, and the reset circuit.
2.1.1
Memory Address Map
The TMP86FS23UG memory is composed Flash, RAM, DBR(Data buffer register) and SFR(Special function register). They are all mapped in 64-Kbyte address space. Figure 2-1 shows the TMP86FS23UG memory address map.
0000H
SFR
003FH 0040H
64 bytes
SFR:
RAM
083FH 0F80H
2048 bytes
RAM:
Special function register includes: I/O ports Peripheral control registers Peripheral status registers System control registers Program status word Random access memory includes: Data memory Stack
DBR:
DBR
0FFFH 1000H
128 bytes
Flash:
Data buffer register includes: Peripheral control registers Peripheral status registers LCD display memory Program memory
Flash
FFB0H FFBFH FFC0H FFDFH FFE0H FFFFH
61440 bytes
Vector table for interrupts (16 bytes) Vector table for vector call instructions (32 bytes) Vector table for interrupts (32 bytes)
Figure 2-1 Memory Address Map 2.1.2 Program Memory (Flash)
The TMP86FS23UG has a 61440 bytes (Address 1000H to FFFFH) of program memory (Flash ).
2.1.3
Data Memory (RAM)
The TMP86FS23UG has 2048 bytes (Address 0040H to 083FH) of internal RAM. The first 192 bytes (0040H to 00FFH) of the internal RAM are located in the direct area; instructions with shorten operations are available against such an area. Page 9
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FS23UG
The data memory contents become unstable when the power supply is turned on; therefore, the data memory should be initialized by an initialization routine.
Example :Clears RAM to "00H". (TMP86FS23UG)
LD LD LD SRAMCLR: LD INC DEC JRS HL, 0040H A, H BC, 07FFH (HL), A HL BC F, SRAMCLR ; Start address setup ; Initial value (00H) setup
2.2 System Clock Controller
The system clock controller consists of a clock generator, a timing generator, and a standby controller.
Timing generator control register Clock generator
XIN fc TBTCR 0036H
High-frequency clock oscillator
XOUT XTIN
Timing generator
fs
Standby controller
0038H SYSCR1 0039H SYSCR2
Low-frequency clock oscillator
XTOUT
System clocks Clock generator control
System control registers
Figure 2-2 System Colck Control 2.2.1 Clock Generator
The clock generator generates the basic clock which provides the system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware. It contains two oscillation circuits: One for the high-frequency clock and one for the low-frequency clock. Power consumption can be reduced by switching of the standby controller to low-power operation based on the low-frequency clock. The high-frequency (fc) clock and low-frequency (fs) clock can easily be obtained by connecting a resonator between the XIN/XOUT and XTIN/XTOUT pins respectively. Clock input from an external oscillator is also possible. In this case, external clock is applied to XIN/XTIN pin with XOUT/XTOUT pin not connected.
Page 10
TMP86FS23UG
High-frequency clock XIN XOUT XIN XOUT (Open) XTIN
Low-frequency clock XTOUT XTIN XTOUT (Open)
(a) Crystal/Ceramic resonator
(b) External oscillator
(c) Crystal
(d) External oscillator
Figure 2-3 Examples of Resonator Connection
Note:The function to monitor the basic clock directly at external is not provided for hardware, however, with disabling all interrupts and watchdog timers, the oscillation frequency can be adjusted by monitoring the pulse which the fixed frequency is outputted to the port by the program. The system to require the adjustment of the oscillation frequency should create the program for the adjustment in advance.
Page 11
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FS23UG
2.2.2
Timing Generator
The timing generator generates the various system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware from the basic clock (fc or fs). The timing generator provides the following functions. 1. Generation of main system clock 2. Generation of divider output (DVO) pulses 3. Generation of source clocks for time base timer 4. Generation of source clocks for watchdog timer 5. Generation of internal source clocks for timer/counters 6. Generation of warm-up clocks for releasing STOP mode 7. LCD
2.2.2.1
Configuration of timing generator
The timing generator consists of a 2-stage prescaler, a 21-stage divider, a main system clock generator, and machine cycle counters. An input clock to the 7th stage of the divider depends on the operating mode, SYSCR2 and TBTCR, that is shown in Figure 2-4. As reset and STOP mode started/canceled, the prescaler and the divider are cleared to "0".
fc or fs
Main system clock generator
SYSCK DV7CK
Machine cycle counters
High-frequency clock fc Low-frequency clock fs
12
fc/4
S A 123456 B Y
Divider
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 S B0 B1 A0 Y0 A1 Y1
Multiplexer
Multiplexer
Warm-up controller
Watchdog timer
Timer counter, Serial interface, Time-base-timer, divider output, etc. (Peripheral functions)
Figure 2-4 Configuration of Timing Generator
Page 12
TMP86FS23UG
Timing Generator Control Register
TBTCR (0036H) 7 (DVOEN) 6 (DVOCK) 5 4 DV7CK 3 (TBTEN) 2 1 (TBTCK) 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
DV7CK
Selection of input to the 7th stage of the divider
0: fc/28 [Hz] 1: fs
R/W
Note 1: In single clock mode, do not set DV7CK to "1". Note 2: Do not set "1" on DV7CK while the low-frequency clock is not operated stably. Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 4: In SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the DV7CK setting is ineffective, and fs is input to the 7th stage of the divider. Note 5: When STOP mode is entered from NORMAL1/2 mode, the DV7CK setting is ineffective during the warm-up period after release of STOP mode, and the 6th stage of the divider is input to the 7th stage during this period.
2.2.2.2
Machine cycle
Instruction execution and peripheral hardware operation are synchronized with the main system clock. The minimum instruction execution unit is called an "machine cycle". There are a total of 10 different types of instructions for the TLCS-870/C Series: Ranging from 1-cycle instructions which require one machine cycle for execution to 10-cycle instructions which require 10 machine cycles for execution. A machine cycle consists of 4 states (S0 to S3), and each state consists of one main system clock.
1/fc or 1/fs [s]
Main system clock
State
S0
S1
S2
S3
S0
S1
S2
S3
Machine cycle
Figure 2-5 Machine Cycle 2.2.3 Operation Mode Control Circuit
The operation mode control circuit starts and stops the oscillation circuits for the high-frequency and lowfrequency clocks, and switches the main system clock. There are three operating modes: Single clock mode, dual clock mode and STOP mode. These modes are controlled by the system control registers (SYSCR1 and SYSCR2). Figure 2-6 shows the operating mode transition diagram.
2.2.3.1
Single-clock mode
Only the oscillation circuit for the high-frequency clock is used, and P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) pins are used as input/output ports. The main-system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock. In the single-clock mode, the machine cycle time is 4/fc [s]. (1) NORMAL1 mode In this mode, both the CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock. The TMP86FS23UG is placed in this mode after reset.
Page 13
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FS23UG
(2)
IDLE1 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remains active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are halted; however on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock). IDLE1 mode is started by SYSCR2 = "1", and IDLE1 mode is released to NORMAL1 mode by an interrupt request from the on-chip peripherals or external interrupt inputs. When the IMF (Interrupt master enable flag) is "1" (Interrupt enable), the execution will resume with the acceptance of the interrupt, and the operation will return to normal after the interrupt service is completed. When the IMF is "0" (Interrupt disable), the execution will resume with the instruction which follows the IDLE1 mode start instruction.
(3)
IDLE0 mode In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode is enabled by SYSCR2 = "1". When IDLE0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with TBTCR, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits. When returned from IDLE0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering NORMAL1 mode back again. IDLE0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR is set. When IMF = "1", EF6 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = "1", and TBTCR = "1", interrupt processing is performed. When IDLE0 mode is entered while TBTCR = "1", the INTTBT interrupt latch is set after returning to NORMAL1 mode.
2.2.3.2
Dual-clock mode
Both the high-frequency and low-frequency oscillation circuits are used in this mode. P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) pins cannot be used as input/output ports. The main system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock in NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and is obtained from the low-frequency clock in SLOW and SLEEP modes. The machine cycle time is 4/fc [s] in the NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and 4/fs [s] (122 s at fs = 32.768 kHz) in the SLOW and SLEEP modes. The TLCS-870/C is placed in the signal-clock mode during reset. To use the dual-clock mode, the lowfrequency oscillator should be turned on at the start of a program. (1) NORMAL2 mode In this mode, the CPU core operates with the high-frequency clock. On-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock and/or low-frequency clock. (2) SLOW2 mode In this mode, the CPU core operates with the low-frequency clock, while both the high-frequency clock and the low-frequency clock are operated. As the SYSCR2 becomes "1", the hardware changes into SLOW2 mode. As the SYSCR2 becomes "0", the hardware changes into NORMAL2 mode. As the SYSCR2 becomes "0", the hardware changes into SLOW1 mode. Do not clear SYSCR2 to "0" during SLOW2 mode. (3) SLOW1 mode This mode can be used to reduce power-consumption by turning off oscillation of the high-frequency clock. The CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the low-frequency clock.
Page 14
TMP86FS23UG
Switching back and forth between SLOW1 and SLOW2 modes are performed by SYSCR2. In SLOW1 and SLEEP modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (4) IDLE2 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remain active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock and/or the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of IDLE2 mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to NORMAL2 mode. (5) SLEEP1 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit of the low-frequency clock remains active. The CPU, the watchdog timer, and the internal oscillation circuit of the high-frequency clock are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of SLEEP mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to SLOW1 mode. In SLOW1 and SLEEP1 modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (6) SLEEP2 mode The SLEEP2 mode is the idle mode corresponding to the SLOW2 mode. The status under the SLEEP2 mode is same as that under the SLEEP1 mode, except for the oscillation circuit of the highfrequency clock. (7) SLEEP0 mode In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode is enabled by setting "1" on bit SYSCR2. When SLEEP0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with TBTCR, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits. When returned from SLEEP0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering SLOW1 mode back again. SLEEP0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR is set. When IMF = "1", EF6 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = "1", and TBTCR = "1", interrupt processing is performed. When SLEEP0 mode is entered while TBTCR = "1", the INTTBT interrupt latch is set after returning to SLOW1 mode.
2.2.3.3
STOP mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit is turned off, causing all system operations to be halted. The internal status immediately prior to the halt is held with a lowest power consumption during STOP mode. STOP mode is started by the system control register 1 (SYSCR1), and STOP mode is released by a inputting (Either level-sensitive or edge-sensitive can be programmably selected) to the STOP pin. After the warm-up period is completed, the execution resumes with the instruction which follows the STOP mode start instruction.
Page 15
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FS23UG
IDLE0 mode
Reset release
RESET
IDLE1 mode (a) Single-clock mode
Note 2 SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR1 = "1" SYSCR2 = "1" NORMAL1 mode Interrupt STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "0" SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR1 = "1" STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "1" STOP SYSCR2 = "1" SLOW2 mode Interrupt SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR2 = "0" SLOW1 mode SYSCR1 = "1" STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "1" SLEEP0 mode
IDLE2 mode
Interrupt
NORMAL2 mode
SYSCR2 = "0" SLEEP2 mode
SLEEP1 mode (b) Dual-clock mode
SYSCR2 = "1" Interrupt Note 2
Note 1: NORMAL1 and NORMAL2 modes are generically called NORMAL; SLOW1 and SLOW2 are called SLOW; IDLE0, IDLE1 and IDLE2 are called IDLE; SLEEP0, SLEEP1 and SLEEP2 are called SLEEP. Note 2: The mode is released by falling edge of TBTCR setting.
Figure 2-6 Operating Mode Transition Diagram
Table 2-1 Operating Mode and Conditions
Oscillator Operating Mode High Frequency Low Frequency CPU Core TBT Other Peripherals Reset Operate 4/fc [s] Machine Cycle Time
RESET NORMAL1 Single clock IDLE1 IDLE0 STOP NORMAL2 IDLE2 SLOW2 Dual clock SLEEP2 SLOW1 SLEEP1 SLEEP0 STOP Stop Stop Oscillation Stop Oscillation
Reset Operate Stop Halt
Reset
Operate
Halt Operate with high frequency
Halt
-
4/fc [s]
Oscillation
Halt Operate with low frequency Halt Operate with low frequency Operate
Operate
4/fs [s]
Halt Halt
Halt
-
Page 16
TMP86FS23UG
System Control Register 1
SYSCR1 (0038H) 7 STOP 6 RELM 5 RETM 4 OUTEN 3 WUT 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 00**)
STOP RELM RETM OUTEN
STOP mode start Release method for STOP mode Operating mode after STOP mode Port output during STOP mode
0: CPU core and peripherals remain active 1: CPU core and peripherals are halted (Start STOP mode) 0: Edge-sensitive release 1: Level-sensitive release 0: Return to NORMAL1/2 mode 1: Return to SLOW1 mode 0: High impedance 1: Output kept Return to NORMAL mode Return to SLOW mode 3 x 213/fs 213/fs 3 x 26/fs 26/fs
R/W R/W R/W R/W
WUT
Warm-up time at releasing STOP mode
00 01 10 11
3 x 216/fc 216/fc 3 x 214/fc 214/fc
R/W
Note 1: Always set RETM to "0" when transiting from NORMAL mode to STOP mode. Always set RETM to "1" when transiting from SLOW mode to STOP mode. Note 2: When STOP mode is released with RESET pin input, a return is made to NORMAL1 regardless of the RETM contents. Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care Note 4: Bits 1 and 0 in SYSCR1 are read as undefined data when a read instruction is executed. Note 5: As the hardware becomes STOP mode under OUTEN = "0", input value is fixed to "0"; therefore it may cause external interrupt request on account of falling edge. Note 6: When the key-on wakeup is used, RELM should be set to "1". Note 7: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes High-Z mode. Note 8: The warmig-up time should be set correctly for using oscillator.
System Control Register 2
SYSCR2 (0039H) 7 XEN 6 XTEN 5 SYSCK 4 IDLE 3 2
TGHALT
1
0 (Initial value: 1000 *0**)
XEN XTEN
High-frequency oscillator control Low-frequency oscillator control Main system clock select (Write)/main system clock monitor (Read) CPU and watchdog timer control (IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes) TG control (IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes)
0: Turn off oscillation 1: Turn on oscillation 0: Turn off oscillation 1: Turn on oscillation 0: High-frequency clock (NORMAL1/NORMAL2/IDLE1/IDLE2) 1: Low-frequency clock (SLOW1/SLOW2/SLEEP1/SLEEP2) 0: CPU and watchdog timer remain active 1: CPU and watchdog timer are stopped (Start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes) 0: Feeding clock to all peripherals from TG 1: Stop feeding clock to peripherals except TBT from TG. (Start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes) R/W R/W
SYSCK
IDLE
TGHALT
Note 1: A reset is applied if both XEN and XTEN are cleared to "0", XEN is cleared to "0" when SYSCK = "0", or XTEN is cleared to "0" when SYSCK = "1". Note 2: *: Don't care, TG: Timing generator, *; Don't care Note 3: Bits 3, 1 and 0 in SYSCR2 are always read as undefined value. Note 4: Do not set IDLE and TGHALT to "1" simultaneously. Note 5: Because returning from IDLE0/SLEEP0 to NORMAL1/SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode might be shorter than the period setting by TBTCR. Note 6: When IDLE1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode is released, IDLE is automatically cleared to "0". Note 7: When IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released, TGHALT is automatically cleared to "0". Note 8: Before setting TGHALT to "1", be sure to stop peripherals. If peripherals are not stopped, the interrupt latch of peripherals may be set after IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released.
Page 17
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FS23UG
2.2.4
Operating Mode Control
STOP mode
STOP mode is controlled by the system control register 1, the STOP pin input and key-on wakeup input (STOP5 to STOP2) which is controlled by the STOP mode release control register (STOPCR). The STOP pin is also used both as a port P20 and an INT5 (external interrupt input 5) pin. STOP mode is started by setting SYSCR1 to "1". During STOP mode, the following status is maintained. 1. Oscillations are turned off, and all internal operations are halted. 2. The data memory, registers, the program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before STOP mode was entered. 3. The prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". 4. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction (e.g., [SET (SYSCR1).7]) which started STOP mode. STOP mode includes a level-sensitive mode and an edge-sensitive mode, either of which can be selected with the SYSCR1. Do not use any key-on wakeup input (STOP5 to STOP2) for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive mode.
2.2.4.1
Note 1: The STOP mode can be released by either the STOP or key-on wakeup pin (STOP5 to STOP2). However, because the STOP pin is different from the key-on wakeup and can not inhibit the release input, the STOP pin must be used for releasing STOP mode. Note 2: During STOP period (from start of STOP mode to end of warm up), due to changes in the external interrupt pin signal, interrupt latches may be set to "1" and interrupts may be accepted immediately after STOP mode is released. Before starting STOP mode, therefore, disable interrupts. Also, before enabling interrupts after STOP mode is released, clear unnecessary interrupt latches.
(1)
Level-sensitive release mode (RELM = "1") In this mode, STOP mode is released by setting the STOP pin high or setting the STOP5 to STOP2 pin input which is enabled by STOPCR. This mode is used for capacitor backup when the main power supply is cut off and long term battery backup. Even if an instruction for starting STOP mode is executed while STOP pin input is high or STOP5
to STOP2 input is low, STOP mode does not start but instead the warm-up sequence starts immediately. Thus, to start STOP mode in the level-sensitive release mode, it is necessary for the program to first confirm that the STOP pin input is low or STOP5 to STOP2 input is high. The following two methods can be used for confirmation. 1. Testing a port. 2. Using an external interrupt input INT5 (INT5 is a falling edge-sensitive input). Example 1 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode by testing a port P20.
LD SSTOPH: TEST JRS DI SET (SYSCR1). 7 (SYSCR1), 01010000B (P2PRD). 0 F, SSTOPH ; IMF 0 ; Starts STOP mode ; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode ; Wait until the STOP pin input goes low level
Page 18
TMP86FS23UG
Example 2 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode with an INT5 interrupt.
PINT5: TEST JRS LD DI SET SINT5: RETI (SYSCR1). 7 (P2PRD). 0 F, SINT5 (SYSCR1), 01010000B ; To reject noise, STOP mode does not start if port P20 is at high ; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode. ; IMF 0 ; Starts STOP mode
STOP pin XOUT pin NORMAL operation STOP operation Confirm by program that the STOP pin input is low and start STOP mode.
VIH
Warm up
NORMAL operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware. Always released if the STOP pin input is high.
Figure 2-7 Level-sensitive Release Mode
Note 1: Even if the STOP pin input is low after warm-up start, the STOP mode is not restarted. Note 2: In this case of changing to the level-sensitive mode from the edge-sensitive mode, the release mode is not switched until a rising edge of the STOP pin input is detected.
(2)
Edge-sensitive release mode (RELM = "0") In this mode, STOP mode is released by a rising edge of the STOP pin input. This is used in applications where a relatively short program is executed repeatedly at periodic intervals. This periodic signal (for example, a clock from a low-power consumption oscillator) is input to the STOP pin. In the edge-sensitive release mode, STOP mode is started even when the STOP pin input is high level. Do not use any STOP5 to STOP2 pin input for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive release mode.
Example :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode
DI LD (SYSCR1), 10010000B ; IMF 0 ; Starts after specified to the edge-sensitive release mode
STOP pin XOUT pin
NORMAL operation STOP mode started by the program. STOP operation
VIH
Warm up NORMAL operation
STOP operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware at the rising edge of STOP pin input.
Figure 2-8 Edge-sensitive Release Mode
Page 19
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FS23UG
STOP mode is released by the following sequence. 1. In the dual-clock mode, when returning to NORMAL2, both the high-frequency and lowfrequency clock oscillators are turned on; when returning to SLOW1 mode, only the lowfrequency clock oscillator is turned on. In the single-clock mode, only the high-frequency clock oscillator is turned on. 2. A warm-up period is inserted to allow oscillation time to stabilize. During warm up, all internal operations remain halted. Four different warm-up times can be selected with the SYSCR1 in accordance with the resonator characteristics. 3. When the warm-up time has elapsed, normal operation resumes with the instruction following the STOP mode start instruction.
Note 1: When the STOP mode is released, the start is made after the prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". Note 2: STOP mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin, which immediately performs the normal reset operation. Note 3: When STOP mode is released with a low hold voltage, the following cautions must be observed. The power supply voltage must be at the operating voltage level before releasing STOP mode. The RESET pin input must also be "H" level, rising together with the power supply voltage. In this case, if an external time constant circuit has been connected, the RESET pin input voltage will increase at a slower pace than the power supply voltage. At this time, there is a danger that a reset may occur if input voltage level of the RESET pin drops below the non-inverting high-level input voltage (Hysteresis input).
Table 2-2 Warm-up Time Example (at fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Warm-up Time [ms] WUT Return to NORMAL Mode 00 01 10 11 12.288 4.096 3.072 1.024 Return to SLOW Mode 750 250 5.85 1.95
Note 1: The warm-up time is obtained by dividing the basic clock by the divider. Therefore, the warm-up time may include a certain amount of error if there is any fluctuation of the oscillation frequency when STOP mode is released. Thus, the warm-up time must be considered as an approximate value.
Page 20
Turn off
Oscillator circuit
Turn on
Main system clock a+3 SET (SYSCR1). 7 n+1 (a) STOP mode start (Example: Start with SET (SYSCR1). 7 instruction located at address a) n+2 n+3 n+4 Halt
Program counter
a+2
Instruction execution
Divider
n
0
Figure 2-9 STOP Mode Start/Release
a+4
Instruction address a + 2
Page 21
0 1 (b) STOP mode release
Warm up
STOP pin input
Oscillator circuit
Turn off
Turn on
Main system clock a+5
Instruction address a + 3
Program counter
a+3
a+6
Instruction address a + 4
Instruction execution
Halt
Divider
0
Count up
2
3
TMP86FS23UG
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FS23UG
2.2.4.2
IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and maskable interrupts. The following status is maintained during these modes. 1. Operation of the CPU and watchdog timer (WDT) is halted. On-chip peripherals continue to operate. 2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before these modes were entered. 3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts these modes.
Starting IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Yes Reset input No No Interrupt request Yes "0" IMF
Reset
Normal release mode
"1" (Interrupt release mode) Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction which follows the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction
Figure 2-10 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes
Page 22
TMP86FS23UG
* Start the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes After IMF is set to "0", set the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) which releases IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes. To start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, set SYSCR2 to "1". * Release the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. These modes are selected by interrupt master enable flag (IMF). After releasing IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the SYSCR2 is automatically cleared to "0" and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes. IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode. (1) Normal release mode (IMF = "0") IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled by the individual interrupt enable flag (EF). After the interrupt is generated, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction. Normally, the interrupt latches (IL) of the interrupt source used for releasing must be cleared to "0" by load instructions. (2) Interrupt release mode (IMF = "1") IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled with the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) and the interrupt processing is started. After the interrupt is processed, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the instruction, which starts IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes.
Note: When a watchdog timer interrupts is generated immediately before IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes will not be started.
Page 23
Main system clock
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
Interrupt request a+2 SET (SYSCR2). 4 Operate Halt a+3
Program counter
Instruction execution
Watchdog timer
(a) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a)
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+3 Instruction address a + 2 Operate Normal release mode a+4
Program counter
Figure 2-11 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes Start/Release
Page 24
a+3 Acceptance of interrupt Operate Operate Interrupt release mode
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
Main system clock
Interrupt request
Program counter
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
TMP86FS23UG
(b) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes release
TMP86FS23UG
2.2.4.3
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0)
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and the time base timer control register (TBTCR). The following status is maintained during IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes. 1. Timing generator stops feeding clock to peripherals except TBT. 2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes were entered. 3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes.
Note: Before starting IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, be sure to stop (Disable) peripherals.
Stopping peripherals by instruction
Starting IDLE0, SLEEP0 modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Reset input No No TBT source clock falling edge Yes TBTCR = "1" Yes TBT interrupt enable Yes No IMF = "1"
Yes
Reset
No
No
(Normal release mode)
Yes (Interrupt release mode) Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction which follows the IDLE0, SLEEP0 modes start instruction
Figure 2-12 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes
Page 25
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FS23UG
* Start the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes Stop (Disable) peripherals such as a timer counter. To start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, set SYSCR2 to "1". * Release the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. These modes are selected by interrupt master flag (IMF), the individual interrupt enable flag of TBT and TBTCR. After releasing IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, the SYSCR2 is automatically cleared to "0" and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR is set to "1", INTTBT interrupt latch is set to "1". IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start/release without reference to TBTCR setting.
(1)
Normal release mode (IMF*EF6*TBTCR = "0") IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the TBTCR. After the falling edge is detected, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start instruction. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR is set to "1", INTTBT interrupt latch is set to "1".
(2)
Interrupt release mode (IMF*EF6*TBTCR = "1") IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the TBTCR and INTTBT interrupt processing is started.
Note 1: Because returning from IDLE0, SLEEP0 to NORMAL1, SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0, SLEEP0 mode might be the shorter than the period setting by TBTCR. Note 2: When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated immediately before IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode is started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode will not be started.
Page 26
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+2 a+3
Program counter
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 2
Halt
Watchdog timer
Operate
(a) IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a
Main system clock
TBT clock a+3 a+4
Program counter
Figure 2-13 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes Start/Release
Page 27
Instruction address a + 2 Operate
Normal release mode a+3
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
Main system clock
TBT clock
Program counter
Instruction execution
Halt
Acceptance of interrupt Operate
Interrupt release mode
(b) IDLE and SLEEP0 modes release
TMP86FS23UG
Watchdog timer
Halt
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86FS23UG
2.2.4.4
SLOW mode
SLOW mode is controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2). The following is the methods to switch the mode with the warm-up counter. (1) Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode First, set SYSCR2 to switch the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for SLOW2 mode. Next, clear SYSCR2 to turn off high-frequency oscillation.
Note: The high-frequency clock can be continued oscillation in order to return to NORMAL2 mode from SLOW mode quickly. Always turn off oscillation of high-frequency clock when switching from SLOW mode to stop mode.
Example 1 :Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode.
SET (SYSCR2). 5 ; SYSCR2 1 (Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for SLOW2) CLR (SYSCR2). 7 ; SYSCR2 0 (Turns off high-frequency oscillation)
Example 2 :Switching to the SLOW1 mode after low-frequency clock has stabilized.
SET LD LD LDW DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR SET (TC4CR). 3 (SYSCR2). 5 ; Stops TC4, 3 ; SYSCR2 1 (Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock) CLR (SYSCR2). 7 ; SYSCR2 0 (Turns off high-frequency oscillation) RETI : VINTTC4: DW PINTTC4 ; INTTC4 vector table (TC4CR). 3 (EIRH). 4 (SYSCR2). 6 (TC3CR), 43H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 8000H ; SYSCR2 1 ; Sets mode for TC4, 3 (16-bit mode, fs for source) ; Sets warming-up counter mode ; Sets warm-up time (Depend on oscillator accompanied) ; IMF 0 ; Enables INTTC4 ; IMF 1 ; Starts TC4, 3
Page 28
TMP86FS23UG
(2)
Switching from SLOW1 mode to NORMAL2 mode First, set SYSCR2 to turn on the high-frequency oscillation. When time for stabilization (Warm up) has been taken by the timer/counter (TC4,TC3), clear SYSCR2 to switch the main system clock to the high-frequency clock. SLOW mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: After SYSCK is cleared to "0", executing the instructions is continiued by the low-frequency clock for the period synchronized with low-frequency and high-frequency clocks.
High-frequency clock Low-frequency clock Main system clock SYSCK
Example :Switching from the SLOW1 mode to the NORMAL2 mode (fc = 16 MHz, warm-up time is 4.0 ms).
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR CLR (TC4CR). 3 (SYSCR2). 5 ; Stops TC4, 3 ; SYSCR2 0 (Switches the main system clock to the high-frequency clock) RETI : VINTTC4: DW PINTTC4 ; INTTC4 vector table (TC4CR). 3 (EIRH). 4 (SYSCR2). 7 (TC3CR), 63H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG4), 0F8H ; SYSCR2 1 (Starts high-frequency oscillation) ; Sets mode for TC4, 3 (16-bit mode, fc for source) ; Sets warming-up counter mode ; Sets warm-up time ; IMF 0 ; Enables INTTC4 ; IMF 1 ; Starts TC4, 3
Page 29
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
Highfrequency clock Lowfrequency clock Main system clock Turn off
SYSCK
XEN CLR (SYSCR2). 7 SLOW2 mode (a) Switching to the SLOW mode
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 5
NORMAL2 mode
SLOW1 mode
Figure 2-14 Switching between the NORMAL2 and SLOW Modes
Page 30
CLR (SYSCR2). 5 Warm up during SLOW2 mode (b) Switching to the NORMAL2 mode
Highfrequency clock Lowfrequency clock Main system clock
SYSCK
XEN
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 7
TMP86FS23UG
SLOW1 mode
NORMAL2 mode
TMP86FS23UG
2.3 Reset Circuit
The TMP86FS23UG has four types of reset generation procedures: An external reset input, an address trap reset, a watchdog timer reset and a system clock reset. Of these reset, the address trap reset, the watchdog timer and the system clock reset are a malfunction reset. When the malfunction reset request is detected, reset occurs during the maximum 24/fc[s]. The malfunction reset circuit such as watchdog timer reset, address trap reset and system clock reset is not initialized when power is turned on. Therefore, reset may occur during maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5s at 16.0 MHz) when power is turned on. Table 2-3 shows on-chip hardware initialization by reset action. Table 2-3 Initializing Internal Status by Reset Action
On-chip Hardware Program counter Stack pointer General-purpose registers (W, A, B, C, D, E, H, L, IX, IY) Jump status flag Zero flag Carry flag Half carry flag Sign flag Overflow flag Interrupt master enable flag Interrupt individual enable flags Interrupt latches (JF) (ZF) (CF) (HF) (SF) (VF) (IMF) (EF) (IL) (PC) (SP) Initial Value (FFFEH) Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Output latches of I/O ports Not initialized Not initialized 0 0 Control registers 0 LCD data buffer RAM Refer to each of control register Not initialized Not initialized Refer to I/O port circuitry Watchdog timer Enable Prescaler and divider of timing generator 0 On-chip Hardware Initial Value
2.3.1
External Reset Input
The RESET pin contains a Schmitt trigger (Hysteresis) with an internal pull-up resistor. When the RESET pin is held at "L" level for at least 3 machine cycles (12/fc [s]) with the power supply voltage within the operating voltage range and oscillation stable, a reset is applied and the internal state is initialized. When the RESET pin input goes high, the reset operation is released and the program execution starts at the vector address stored at addresses FFFEH to FFFFH.
VDD
RESET
Internal reset Watchdog timer reset Malfunction reset output circuit Address trap reset System clock reset
Figure 2-15 Reset Circuit
Page 31
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit TMP86FS23UG
2.3.2
Address trap reset
If the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (when WDTCR1 is set to "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be generated. The reset time is maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5s at 16.0 MHz).
Note:The operating mode under address trapped is alternative of reset or interrupt. The address trap area is alternative.
Instruction execution Internal reset
JP a Address trap is occurred
Reset release
Instruction at address r
maximum 24/fc [s]
4/fc to 12/fc [s]
16/fc [s]
Note 1: Address "a" is in the SFR, DBR or on-chip RAM (WDTCR1 = "1") space. Note 2: During reset release, reset vector "r" is read out, and an instruction at address "r" is fetched and decoded.
Figure 2-16 Address Trap Reset 2.3.3 Watchdog timer reset
Refer to Section "Watchdog Timer".
2.3.4
System clock reset
If the condition as follows is detected, the system clock reset occurs automatically to prevent dead lock of the CPU. (The oscillation is continued without stopping.) - In case of clearing SYSCR2 and SYSCR2 simultaneously to "0". - In case of clearing SYSCR2 to "0", when the SYSCR2 is "0". - In case of clearing SYSCR2 to "0", when the SYSCR2 is "1". The reset time is maximum 24/fc (1.5 s at 16.0 MHz).
Page 32
TMP86FS23UG
Page 33
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit TMP86FS23UG
Page 34
TMP86FS23UG
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
The TMP86FS23UG has a total of 20 interrupt sources excluding reset. Interrupts can be nested with priorities. Four of the internal interrupt sources are non-maskable while the rest are maskable. Interrupt sources are provided with interrupt latches (IL), which hold interrupt requests, and independent vectors. The interrupt latch is set to "1" by the generation of its interrupt request which requests the CPU to accept its interrupts. Interrupts are enabled or disabled by software using the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and interrupt enable flag (EF). If more than one interrupts are generated simultaneously, interrupts are accepted in order which is dominated by hardware. However, there are no prioritized interrupt factors among non-maskable interrupts.
Interrupt Latch - - - IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7 IL8 IL9 IL10 IL11 IL12 IL13 IL14 IL15 IL16 IL17 IL18 IL19 IL20 IL21 IL22 IL23 Vector Address FFFE FFFC FFFC FFFA FFF8 FFF6 FFF4 FFF2 FFF0 FFEE FFEC FFEA FFE8 FFE6 FFE4 FFE2 FFE0 FFBE FFBC FFBA FFB8 FFB6 FFB4 FFB2 FFB0
Interrupt Factors Internal/External Internal Internal Internal Internal External External Internal Internal Internal External Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal External Internal External (Reset) INTSWI (Software interrupt) INTUNDEF (Executed the undefined instruction interrupt) INTATRAP (Address trap interrupt) INTWDT (Watchdog timer interrupt)
INT0
Enable Condition Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable IMF* EF4 = 1, INT0EN = 1 IMF* EF5 = 1 IMF* EF6 = 1 IMF* EF7 = 1 IMF* EF8 = 1 IMF* EF9 = 1 IMF* EF10 = 1 IMF* EF11 = 1 IMF* EF12 = 1 IMF* EF13 = 1 IMF* EF14 = 1 IMF* EF15 = 1 IMF* EF16 = 1 IMF* EF17 = 1 IMF* EF18 = 1 IMF* EF19 = 1 IMF* EF20 = 1 IMF* EF21 = 1 IMF* EF22 = 1 IMF* EF23 = 1
Priority 1 2 2 2 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
INT1 INTTBT INTTC1 INTSIO INT2 INTRXD INTTXD INTTC4 INTTC6 INTRTC INTADC INTTC3 INT3 INTTC5
INT5
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Note 1: To use the address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), clear WDTCR1 to "0" (It is set for the "reset request" after reset is cancelled). For details, see "Address Trap". Note 2: To use the watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT), clear WDTCR1 to "0" (It is set for the "Reset request" after reset is released). For details, see "Watchdog Timer". Note 3: If an INTADC interrupt request is generated while an interrupt with priority lower than the interrupt latch IL15 (INTADC) is being accepted, the INTADC interrupt latch may be cleared without the INTADC interrupt being processed. For details, refer to the corresponding notes in the chapter on the AD converter.
3.1 Interrupt latches (IL19 to IL2)
An interrupt latch is provided for each interrupt source, except for a software interrupt and an executed the undefined instruction interrupt. When interrupt request is generated, the latch is set to "1", and the CPU is requested to accept the interrupt if its interrupt is enabled. The interrupt latch is cleared to "0" immediately after accepting interrupt. All interrupt latches are initialized to "0" during reset. Page 35
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR) TMP86FS23UG
The interrupt latches are located on address 002EH, 003CH and 003DH in SFR area. Each latch can be cleared to "0" individually by instruction. However, IL2 and IL3 should not be cleared to "0" by software. For clearing the interrupt latch, load instruction should be used and then IL2 and IL3 should be set to "1". If the read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions are used, interrupt request would be cleared inadequately if interrupt is requested while such instructions are executed. Interrupt latches are not set to "1" by an instruction. Since interrupt latches can be read, the status for interrupt requests can be monitored by software.
Note: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Clears interrupt latches
DI LDW EI (ILL), 1110100000111111B ; IMF 0 ; IL12, IL10 to IL6 0 ; IMF 1
Example 2 :Reads interrupt latchess
LD WA, (ILL) ; W ILH, A ILL
Example 3 :Tests interrupt latches
TEST JR (ILL). 7 F, SSET ; if IL7 = 1 then jump
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR)
The interrupt enable register (EIR) enables and disables the acceptance of interrupts, except for the non-maskable interrupts (Software interrupt, undefined instruction interrupt, address trap interrupt and watchdog interrupt). Nonmaskable interrupt is accepted regardless of the contents of the EIR. The EIR consists of an interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and the individual interrupt enable flags (EF). These registers are located on address 002CH, 003AH and 003BH in SFR area, and they can be read and written by an instructions (Including read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions).
3.2.1
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF)
The interrupt enable register (IMF) enables and disables the acceptance of the whole maskable interrupt. While IMF = "0", all maskable interrupts are not accepted regardless of the status on each individual interrupt enable flag (EF). By setting IMF to "1", the interrupt becomes acceptable if the individuals are enabled. When an interrupt is accepted, IMF is cleared to "0" after the latest status on IMF is stacked. Thus the maskable interrupts which follow are disabled. By executing return interrupt instruction [RETI/RETN], the stacked data, which was the status before interrupt acceptance, is loaded on IMF again. The IMF is located on bit0 in EIRL (Address: 003AH in SFR), and can be read and written by an instruction. The IMF is normally set and cleared by [EI] and [DI] instruction respectively. During reset, the IMF is initialized to "0".
Page 36
TMP86FS23UG
3.2.2
Individual interrupt enable flags (EF19 to EF4)
Each of these flags enables and disables the acceptance of its maskable interrupt. Setting the corresponding bit of an individual interrupt enable flag to "1" enables acceptance of its interrupt, and setting the bit to "0" disables acceptance. During reset, all the individual interrupt enable flags (EF19 to EF4) are initialized to "0" and all maskable interrupts are not accepted until they are set to "1".
Note:In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Enables interrupts individually and sets IMF
DI LDW : : EI ; IMF 1 (EIRL), 1110100010100000B ; IMF 0 ; EF15 to EF13, EF11, EF7, EF5 1 Note: IMF should not be set.
Example 2 :C compiler description example
unsigned int _io (3AH) EIRL; _DI(); EIRL = 10100000B; : _EI(); /* 3AH shows EIRL address */
Page 37
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR) TMP86FS23UG
Interrupt Latches
(Initial value: 00000000 000000**) ILH,ILL (003DH, 003CH) 15 IL15 14 IL14 13 IL13 12 IL12 11 IL11 10 IL10 9 IL9 8 IL8 7 IL7 6 IL6 5 IL5 4 IL4 3 IL3 2 IL2 1 0
ILH (003DH)
ILL (003CH)
(Initial value: ****0000) ILE (002EH) 7 - 6 - 5 - 4 - 3 IL19 2 IL18 1 IL17 0 IL16
ILE (002EH)
IL19 to IL2
Interrupt latches
at RD 0: No interrupt request 1: Interrupt request
at WR 0: Clears the interrupt request 1: (Interrupt latch is not set.)
R/W
Note 1: To clear any one of bits IL7 to IL4, be sure to write "1" into IL2 and IL3. Note 2: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1". Note 3: Do not clear IL with read-modify-write instructions such as bit operations.
Interrupt Enable Registers
(Initial value: 00000000 0000***0) EIRH,EIRL (003BH, 003AH) 15 EF15 14 EF14 13 EF13 12 EF12 11 EF11 10 EF10 9 EF9 8 EF8 7 EF7 6 EF6 5 EF5 4 EF4 EIRL (003AH) 3 2 1 0 IMF
EIRH (003BH)
(Initial value: ****0000) EIRE (002CH) 7 - 6 - 5 - 4 - 3 EF19 2 EF18 1 EF17 0 EF16
EIRE (002CH)
EF19 to EF4 IMF
Individual-interrupt enable flag (Specified for each bit) Interrupt master enable flag
0: 1: 0: 1:
Disables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Enables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Disables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts Enables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts
R/W
Note 1: *: Don't care Note 2: Do not set IMF and the interrupt enable flag (EF15 to EF4) to "1" at the same time. Note 3: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Page 38
TMP86FS23UG
3.3 Interrupt Sequence
An interrupt request, which raised interrupt latch, is held, until interrupt is accepted or interrupt latch is cleared to "0" by resetting or an instruction. Interrupt acceptance sequence requires 8 machine cycles (2 s @16 MHz) after the completion of the current instruction. The interrupt service task terminates upon execution of an interrupt return instruction [RETI] (for maskable interrupts) or [RETN] (for non-maskable interrupts). Figure 3-1 shows the timing chart of interrupt acceptance processing.
3.3.1
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows.
a. The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) is cleared to "0" in order to disable the acceptance of any following interrupt. b. The interrupt latch (IL) for the interrupt source accepted is cleared to "0". c. The contents of the program counter (PC) and the program status word, including the interrupt master enable flag (IMF), are saved (Pushed) on the stack in sequence of PSW + IMF, PCH, PCL. Meanwhile, the stack pointer (SP) is decremented by 3. d. The entry address (Interrupt vector) of the corresponding interrupt service program, loaded on the vector table, is transferred to the program counter. e. The instruction stored at the entry address of the interrupt service program is executed.
Note:When the contents of PSW are saved on the stack, the contents of IMF are also saved.
1-machine cycle
Interrupt service task
Interrupt request Interrupt latch (IL)
IMF Execute instruction a-1 Execute instruction Execute instruction
Interrupt acceptance
Execute RETI instruction
PC
a
a+1
a
b
b+1 b+2 b + 3
c+1
c+2
a
a+1 a+2
SP
n
n-1 n-2
n-3
n-2 n-1
n
Note 1: a: Return address entry address, b: Entry address, c: Address which RETI instruction is stored Note 2: On condition that interrupt is enabled, it takes 38/fc [s] or 38/fs [s] at maximum (If the interrupt latch is set at the first machine cycle on 10 cycle instruction) to start interrupt acceptance processing since its interrupt latch is set.
Figure 3-1 Timing Chart of Interrupt Acceptance/Return Interrupt Instruction
Example: Correspondence between vector table address for INTTBT and the entry address of the interrupt service program
Vector table address
Entry address Interrupt service program
FFF2H FFF3H
03H D2H
Vector
D203H D204H
0FH 06H
Figure 3-2 Vector table address,Entry address
Page 39
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.3 Interrupt Sequence TMP86FS23UG
A maskable interrupt is not accepted until the IMF is set to "1" even if the maskable interrupt higher than the level of current servicing interrupt is requested. In order to utilize nested interrupt service, the IMF is set to "1" in the interrupt service program. In this case, acceptable interrupt sources are selectively enabled by the individual interrupt enable flags. To avoid overloaded nesting, clear the individual interrupt enable flag whose interrupt is currently serviced, before setting IMF to "1". As for non-maskable interrupt, keep interrupt service shorten compared with length between interrupt requests; otherwise the status cannot be recovered as non-maskable interrupt would simply nested.
3.3.2
Saving/restoring general-purpose registers
During interrupt acceptance processing, the program counter (PC) and the program status word (PSW, includes IMF) are automatically saved on the stack, but the accumulator and others are not. These registers are saved by software if necessary. When multiple interrupt services are nested, it is also necessary to avoid using the same data memory area for saving registers. The following methods are used to save/restore the generalpurpose registers.
3.3.2.1
Using PUSH and POP instructions
If only a specific register is saved or interrupts of the same source are nested, general-purpose registers can be saved/restored using the PUSH/POP instructions.
Example :Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
PINTxx: PUSH WA ; Save WA register (interrupt processing) POP RETI WA ; Restore WA register ; RETURN
Address (Example) SP A SP PCL PCH PSW At acceptance of an interrupt W PCL PCH PSW At execution of PUSH instruction SP PCL PCH PSW At execution of POP instruction SP b-5 b-4 b-3 b-2 b-1 b At execution of RETI instruction
Figure 3-3 Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
3.3.2.2 Using data transfer instructions
To save only a specific register without nested interrupts, data transfer instructions are available.
Page 40
TMP86FS23UG
Example :Save/store register using data transfer instructions
PINTxx: LD (GSAVA), A ; Save A register (interrupt processing) LD RETI A, (GSAVA) ; Restore A register ; RETURN
Main task Interrupt acceptance Interrupt service task Saving registers
Restoring registers Interrupt return Saving/Restoring general-purpose registers using PUSH/POP data transfer instruction
Figure 3-4 Saving/Restoring General-purpose Registers under Interrupt Processing 3.3.3 Interrupt return
Interrupt return instructions [RETI]/[RETN] perform as follows.
[RETI]/[RETN] Interrupt Return 1. Program counter (PC) and program status word (PSW, includes IMF) are restored from the stack. 2. Stack pointer (SP) is incremented by 3.
As for address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), it is required to alter stacked data for program counter (PC) to restarting address, during interrupt service program.
Note:If [RETN] is executed with the above data unaltered, the program returns to the address trap area and INTATRAP occurs again.When interrupt acceptance processing has completed, stacked data for PCL and PCH are located on address (SP + 1) and (SP + 2) respectively.
Example 1 :Returning from address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) service program
PINTxx: POP LD PUSH WA WA, Return Address WA ; Recover SP by 2 ; ; Alter stacked data
(interrupt processing) RETN ; RETURN
Page 41
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW) TMP86FS23UG
Example 2 :Restarting without returning interrupt (In this case, PSW (Includes IMF) before interrupt acceptance is discarded.)
PINTxx: INC INC INC SP SP SP ; Recover SP by 3 ; ;
(interrupt processing) LD JP EIRL, data Restart Address ; Set IMF to "1" or clear it to "0" ; Jump into restarting address
Interrupt requests are sampled during the final cycle of the instruction being executed. Thus, the next interrupt can be accepted immediately after the interrupt return instruction is executed.
Note 1: It is recommended that stack pointer be return to rate before INTATRAP (Increment 3 times), if return interrupt instruction [RETN] is not utilized during interrupt service program under INTATRAP (such as Example 2). Note 2: When the interrupt processing time is longer than the interrupt request generation time, the interrupt service task is performed but not the main task.
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW)
Executing the SWI instruction generates a software interrupt and immediately starts interrupt processing (INTSW is highest prioritized interrupt). Use the SWI instruction only for detection of the address error or for debugging.
3.4.1
Address error detection
FFH is read if for some cause such as noise the CPU attempts to fetch an instruction from a non-existent memory address during single chip mode. Code FFH is the SWI instruction, so a software interrupt is generated and an address error is detected. The address error detection range can be further expanded by writing FFH to unused areas of the program memory. Address trap reset is generated in case that an instruction is fetched from RAM, DBR or SFR areas.
3.4.2
Debugging
Debugging efficiency can be increased by placing the SWI instruction at the software break point setting address.
3.5 Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF)
Taking code which is not defined as authorized instruction for instruction causes INTUNDEF. INTUNDEF is generated when the CPU fetches such a code and tries to execute it. INTUNDEF is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTUNDEF interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The undefined instruction interrupt (INTUNDEF) forces CPU to jump into vector address, as software interrupt (SWI) does.
3.6 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
Fetching instruction from unauthorized area for instructions (Address trapped area) causes reset output or address trap interrupt (INTATRAP). INTATRAP is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTATRAP interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The operating mode under address trapped, whether to be reset output or interrupt processing, is selected on watchdog timer control register (WDTCR).
Page 42
TMP86FS23UG
3.7 External Interrupts
The TMP86FS23UG has 5 external interrupt inputs. These inputs are equipped with digital noise reject circuits (Pulse inputs of less than a certain time are eliminated as noise). Edge selection is also possible with INT1 to INT3. The INT0/P63 pin can be configured as either an external interrupt input pin or an input/output port, and is configured as an input port during reset. Edge selection, noise reject control and INT0/P63 pin function selection are performed by the external interrupt control register (EINTCR).
Source Pin Enable Conditions Release Edge Digital Noise Reject Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 15/fc or 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 49/fc or 193/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
INT0
INT0
IMF
EF4
INT0EN=1
Falling edge
INT1
INT1
IMF
EF5 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT2
INT2
IMF
EF9 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT3
INT3
IMF
EF17 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT5
INT5
IMF
EF19 = 1
Falling edge
Note 1: In NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, if a signal with no noise is input on an external interrupt pin, it takes a maximum of "signal establishment time + 6/fs[s]" from the input signal's edge to set the interrupt latch. Note 2: When INT0EN = "0", IL4 is not set even if a falling edge is detected on the INT0 pin input. Note 3: When a pin with more than one function is used as an output and a change occurs in data or input/output status, an interrupt request signal is generated in a pseudo manner. In this case, it is necessary to perform appropriate processing such as disabling the interrupt enable flag.
Page 43
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.7 External Interrupts TMP86FS23UG
External Interrupt Control Register
EINTCR (0037H) 7 INT1NC 6 INT0EN 5 4 3 INT3ES 2 INT2ES 1 INT1ES 0 (Initial value: 00** 000*)
INT1NC INT0EN INT3 ES INT2 ES INT1 ES
Noise reject time select P63/INT0 pin configuration INT3 edge select INT2 edge select INT1 edge select
0: Pulses of less than 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 1: Pulses of less than 15/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 0: P63 input/output port 1: INT0 pin (Port P63 should be set to an input mode) 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 2: When the system clock frequency is switched between high and low or when the external interrupt control register (EINTCR) is overwritten, the noise canceller may not operate normally. It is recommended that external interrupts are disabled using the interrupt enable register (EIR). Note 3: The maximum time from modifying INT1NC until a noise reject time is changed is 26/fc.
Page 44
TMP86FS23UG
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
The TMP86FS23UG adopts the memory mapped I/O system, and all peripheral control and data transfers are performed through the special function register (SFR) or the data buffer register (DBR). The SFR is mapped on address 0000H to 003FH, DBR is mapped on address 0F80H to 0FFFH. This chapter shows the arrangement of the special function register (SFR) and data buffer register (DBR) for TMP86FS23UG.
4.1 SFR
Address 0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H 0005H 0006H 0007H 0008H 0009H 000AH 000BH 000CH 000DH 000EH 000FH 0010H 0011H 0012H 0013H 0014H 0015H 0016H 0017H 0018H 0019H 001AH 001BH 001CH 001DH 001EH 001FH 0020H 0021H 0022H 0023H 0024H 0025H UARTSR ADCDR2 ADCDR1 Reserved Reserved P8CR UARTCR1 TC1SR RTCCR TC3CR TC4CR TC5CR TC6CR TTREG3 TTREG4 TTREG5 TTREG6 TC1CR1 TC1CR2 Read Reserved P1DR P2DR P3DR P3OUTCR P5DR P6DR P7DR P8DR P1CR P5CR P6CR1 P6CR2 P7CR ADCCR1 ADCCR2 TREG1AL TREG1AM TREG1AH TREG1B TC1CR Write
Page 45
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 SFR TMP86FS23UG
Address 0026H 0027H 0028H 0029H 002AH 002BH 002CH 002DH 002EH 002FH 0030H 0031H 0032H 0033H 0034H 0035H 0036H 0037H 0038H 0039H 003AH 003BH 003CH 003DH 003EH 003FH
Read LCDCR PWREG3 PWREG4 PWREG5 PWREG6 EIRE Reserved ILE Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved TBTCR EINTCR SYSCR1 SYSCR2 EIRL EIRH ILL ILH Reserved PSW
Write UARTCR2
WDTCR1 WDTCR2
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program. Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 46
TMP86FS23UG
4.2 DBR
Address 0F80H 0F81H 0F82H 0F83H 0F84H 0F85H 0F86H 0F87H 0F88H 0F89H 0F8AH 0F8BH 0F8CH 0F8DH 0F8EH 0F8FH 0F90H 0F91H 0F92H 0F93H 0F94H 0F95H 0F96H 0F97H 0F98H 0F99H 0F9AH 0F9BH 0F9CH 0F9DH 0F9EH 0F9FH SIOSR RDBUF P2PRD P3PRD P1LCR P5LCR Read SEG1/0 SEG3/2 SEG5/4 SEG7/6 SEG9/8 SEG11/10 SEG13/12 SEG15/14 SEG17/16 SEG19/18 SEG21/20 SEG23/22 SEG25/24 SEG27/26 SEG29/28 SEG31/30 SIOBR0 SIOBR1 SIOBR2 SIOBR3 SIOBR4 SIOBR5 SIOBR6 SIOBR7 SIOCR1 SIOCR2 STOPCR TDBUF Write
Page 47
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.2 DBR TMP86FS23UG
Address 0FA0H 0FA1H 0FA2H 0FA3H 0FA4H 0FA5H 0FA6H 0FA7H 0FA8H 0FA9H 0FAAH 0FABH 0FACH 0FADH 0FAEH 0FAFH 0FB0H 0FB1H 0FB2H 0FB3H 0FB4H 0FB5H 0FB6H 0FB7H 0FB8H 0FB9H 0FBAH 0FBBH 0FBCH 0FBDH 0FBEH 0FBFH
Read P7LCR P8LCR Reserved Reserved MACCR MACSR MPLDRL MPLDRH MPCDRL MPCDRH RCALDR1 RCALDR2 RCALDR3 RCALDR4 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Write
-
MADDR1 MADDR2 MADDR3 MADDR4
Address 0FC0H :: 0FDFH
Read Reserved :: Reserved
Write
Page 48
TMP86FS23UG
Address 0FE0H 0FE1H 0FE2H 0FE3H 0FE4H 0FE5H 0FE6H 0FE7H 0FE8H 0FE9H 0FEAH 0FEBH 0FECH 0FEDH 0FEEH 0FEFH 0FF0H 0FF1H 0FF2H 0FF3H 0FF4H 0FF5H 0FF6H 0FF7H 0FF8H 0FF9H 0FFAH 0FFBH 0FFCH 0FFDH 0FFEH 0FFFH
Read Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved SPCR Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved FLSCR
Write
FLSSTB
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program. Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 49
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.2 DBR TMP86FS23UG
Page 50
TMP86FS23UG
5. I/O Ports
The TMP86FS23UG has 7 parallel input/output ports (48 pins) and output ports (3 pins) as follows.
Primary Function Port P1 Port P2 8-bit I/O port 3-bit I/O port 5-bit I/O port 3-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port 8-bit I/O port Secondary Functions External interrupt input, UART input/output, Serial PROM mode control input and segment output. Low-frequency resonator connections, external interrupt input, STOP mode release signal input. Timer/counter input/output serial interface input/output and divider output. Timer/counter input/output. LCD segment output. Analog input, external interrupt input, timer/counter input and STOP mode release signal input. LCD segment output. LCD segment output.
Port P3 Port P5 Port P6 Port P7 Port P8
Each output port contains a latch, which holds the output data. All input ports do not have latches, so the external input data should be externally held until the input data is read from outside or reading should be performed several timer before processing. Figure 5-1 shows input/output timing examples. External data is read from an I/O port in the S1 state of the read cycle during execution of the read instruction. This timing cannot be recognized from outside, so that transient input such as chattering must be processed by the program. Output data changes in the S2 state of the write cycle during execution of the instruction which writes to an I/O port.
Fetch cycle S0 Instruction execution cycle S1 S2 S3 Fetch cycle S0 S1 S2 S3 S0 Read cycle S1 S2 S3
Ex: LD A, (x)
Input strobe
Data input (a) Input timing
Fetch cycle S0 Instruction execution cycle S1 S2 S3
Fetch cycle S0 S1 S2 (x), A S3 S0
Write cycle S1 S2 S3
Ex: LD
Output strobe
Data output
Old
New
(b) Output timing
Note: The positions of the read and write cycles may vary, depending on the instruction.
Figure 5-1 Input/Output Timing (Example)
Page 51
5. I/O Ports
5.1 Port P1 (P17 to P10) TMP86FS23UG
5.1 Port P1 (P17 to P10)
Port P1 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit. Port P1 is also used as a UART input/output, an external interrupt input, a serial PROM mode control input and segment output of LCD. Input/output mode is specified by the P1 control register (P1CR). When used as an input port or a secondary function input pins (UART input or external interrupt input), the corresponding bit of P1CR and P1LCR should be cleared to "0". When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P1CR should be set to "1", and the respective P1LCR bit should be cleared to "0". When used as an UART output pin, the corresponding bit of P1CR and the output latch (P1DR) should be set to "1", and the respective P1LCR bit should be cleared to "0". When used as a segment pins of LCD, the respective bit of P1LCR should be set to "1". During reset, the P1DR, P1CR and P1LCR are initialized to "0". When the bit of P1CR and P1LCR is "0", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is a terminal input data. When the bit of P1CR is "0" and that of P1LCR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is always "0". When the bit of P1CR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is the value of P1DR. Table 5-1 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value Function P1DR Port input, UART input, and external interrupt input Port "0" output Port "1" output and UART output LCD segment output * "0" "1" * P1CR "0" "1" "1" * P1LCR "0" "0" "0" "1"
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates "1" or "0" either of which can be selected.
Table 5-2 Values Read from P1DR and Register Programming
Conditions Values Read from P1DR P1CR "0" "0" "1" "1" P1LCR "0" "1" "0" Output latch contents Terminal input data "0"
Page 52
TMP86FS23UG
STOP OUTEN P1LCRi input P1LCRi P1CRi input P1CRi Data input (P1DRi) Data output (P1DRi) Control output Control input LCD data output DQ Output latch P1i Note: i = 7 to 0 D Q D Q
Figure 5-2 Port P1
7 P1DR (0001H) R/W P17 SEG24
6 P16 SEG25
5 P15 SEG26
4 P14 SEG27 INT3 4
3 P13 SEG28 INT2 3
2 P12 SEG29 INT1 2
1 P11 SEG30 TXD 1
0 P10 SEG31 RXD BOOT 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P1LCR (0F9EH)
7
6
5
P1LCR
Port P1/segment output control (set for each bit individually)
0: P1 input/output port or secondary function (expect for segment) 1: LCD segment output
R/W
P1CR (0009H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P1CR
P1 port input/output control (set for each bit individually)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
Note: The port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by executing a bit manipulation instruction.
Page 53
5. I/O Ports
5.2 Port P2 (P22 to P20) TMP86FS23UG
5.2 Port P2 (P22 to P20)
Port P2 is a 3-bit input/output port. It is also used as an external interrupt, a STOP mode release signal input, and low-frequency crystal oscillator connection pins. When used as an input port or a secondary function pins, respective output latch (P2DR) should be set to "1". During reset, the P2DR is initialized to "1". A low-frequency crystal oscillator (32.768 kHz) is connected to pins P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) in the dualclock mode. In the single-clock mode, pins P21 and P22 can be used as normal input/output ports. It is recommended that pin P20 should be used as an external interrupt input, a STOP mode release signal input, or an input port. If it is used as an output port, the interrupt latch is set on the falling edge of the output pulse. P2 port output latch (P2DR) and P2 port terminal input (P2PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P2DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P2PRD register should be read. If a read instruction is executed for port P2, read data of bits 7 to 3 are unstable.
Data input (P20PRD) Data input (P20) Data output (P20) Control input Data input (P21PRD) Output latch read (P21) Data output (P21) Data input (P22PRD) Output latch read (P22) Data output (P22) STOP OUTEN XTEN fs DQ Output latch DQ Output latch DQ Output latch P20 (INT5, STOP)
Osc. enable P21 (XTIN)
P22 (XTOUT)
Figure 5-3 Port P2
P2DR (0002H) R/W P2PRD (0F9CH) Read only
7
6
5
4
3
2 P22 XTOUT
1 P21 XTIN 1 P21
0 P20
INT5 STOP
(Initial value: **** *111)
7
6
5
4
3
2 P22
0 P20
Note: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes High-Z mode.
Page 54
TMP86FS23UG
5.3 Port P3 (P37 to P30)
Port P3 is a 3-bit output and a 5-bit input/output port. It is also used as a timer/counter input/output, serial interface input/output or divider output. When used as a timer/counter output, serial interface output or divider output, respective output latch (P3DR) should be set to "1". It can be selected whether output circuit of P30 to P34 port is C-MOS output or a sink open drain individually, by setting P3OUTCR. When a corresponding bit of P3OUTCR is "0", the output circuit is selected to a sink open drain and when a corresponding bit of P3OUTCR is "1", the output circuit is selected to a C-MOS output. When used as an input port, serial interface input or timer/counter input, respective output control (P3OUTCR) should be set to "0" after P3DR is set to "1". During reset, the P3DR is initialized to "1", and the P3OUTCR is initialized to "0". P3 port output latch (P3DR) and P3 port terminal input (P3PRD) are located on their respective address. When read the output latch data, the P3DR should be read and when read the terminal input data, the P3PRD register should be read. If a read instruction is executed for the P3PRD and the P3OUTCR, read data of bits 7 to 5 are unstable. Table 5-3 Register Programming for Multi-function ports (P34 to P30)
Programmed Value Function P3DR Port input, serial interface input, or timer counter input Port "0" output Port "1" output, serial interface output, or timer counter output "1" "0" "1" P3OUTCR "0" Programming for each applications
Table 5-4 Register Programming for Multi-function (P37 to P35)
Function Programmed Value P3DR Port "0" output Port "1" output, timer counter output, or divider output "0" "1"
STOP OUTEN P3OUTCRi P3OUTCRi input Data input (P3PRD) Output latch read (P3DR) Data output (P3DR) Control output Control input STOP OUTEN Output latch read (P3DRj) Data output (P3DRj) Control output
D
Q
Output latch
D
Q
P3i Note: i = 4 to 0
Output latch
D
Q
P3j Note: j = 7 to 5
Figure 5-4 Port P3
Page 55
5. I/O Ports
5.3 Port P3 (P37 to P30) TMP86FS23UG
7 P3DR (0003H) R/W P37
DVO
6 P36
PWM3 PDO3
5 P35
PWM4 PDO4 PPG4
4 P34
PWM5 PDO5
3 P33
PWM6 PDO6 PPG6
2 P32
SCK
1 P31 SO TC3
0 P30 SI TC4
(Initial value: 1111 111)
TC5 4
TC6 P3OUTCR (0004H) 7 6 5 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: ***0 0000)
P3OUTCR
Port P3 output circuit control (set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: C-MOS output
R/W
P3PRD (0F9DH) Read only
7
6
5
4 P34
3 P33
2 P32
1 P31
0 P30
Page 56
TMP86FS23UG
5.4 Port P5 (P57 to P50)
Port P5 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit. Port P5 is also used as a segment output of LCD. Input/output mode is specified by the P5 control register (P5CR). When used as an input port, the corresponding bit of P5CR and P5LCR should be cleared to "0". When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P5CR should be set to "1", and the respective P5LCR bit should be cleared to "0". When used as a segment pins of LCD, the respective bit of P5LCR should be set to "1". During reset, the output latch (P5DR), P5CR and P5LCR are initialized to "0". When the bit of P5CR and P5LCR is "0", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is a terminal input data. When the bit of P5CR is "0" and that of P5LCR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is always "0". When the bit of P5CR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is the value of P5DR. Table 5-5 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value Function P5DR Port input Port "0" output Port "1" output LCD segment output * "0" "1" * P5CR "0" "1" "1" * P5LCR "0" "0" "0" "1"
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates "1" or "0" either of which can be selected.
Table 5-6 Values Read from P5DR and Register Programming
Conditions Values Read from P5DR P5CR "0" "0" "1" "1" P5LCR "0" "1" "0" Output latch contents Terminal input data "0"
STOP OUTEN P5LCRi input P5LCRi P5CRi input P5CRi Data input (P5DRi) Data output (P5DRi) LCD data output DQ Output latch P5i Note: i = 7 to 0 D Q D Q
Figure 5-5 Port P5
Page 57
5. I/O Ports
5.4 Port P5 (P57 to P50) TMP86FS23UG
7 P5DR (0005H) R/W P5LCR (0F9FH) P57 SEG16
6 P56 SEG17
5 P55 SEG18
4 P54 SEG19
3 P53 SEG20
2 P52 SEG21
1 P51 SEG22
0 P50 SEG23 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P5LCR
Port P5/segment output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: P5 input/output port 1: LCD segment output
R/W
P5CR (000AH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P5CR
P5 port input/output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
Note: The port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by executing a bit manipulation instruction.
Page 58
TMP86FS23UG
5.5 Port P6 (P67 to P60)
Port P6 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit. Port P6 is also used as an analog input, Key on Wake up input, timer/counter input and external interrupt input. Input/output mode is specified by the P6 control register (P6CR1) and input control register (P6CR2). When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P6CR1 should be set to "1". When used as an input port, timer/counter input or an external interrupt input, the corresponding bit of P6CR1 should be cleared to "0", and then, the corresponding bit of P6CR2 should be set to "1". When used as an analog input or key on wake up input, the corresponding bit of P6CR1 should be cleared to "0", and then, the corresponding bit of P6CR2 should be cleared to "0" . The output latch of each digital input port with multiple functions should be set to "0" to prevent flow-through current. Therefore, the output latch of each port to be used for analog input should be preprogrammed to "0". The conversion input channel to be used is actually selected by ADCCR1. During reset, the output latch (P6DR) and P6CR1 are initialized to 0", P6CR2 is initialized to "1". When the bit of P6CR1 and P6CR2 is "0", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is always "0". When the bit of P6CR1 is "0" and that of P6CR2 is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is a terminal input data. When the bit of P6CR1 is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is the value of P6DR. Table 5-7 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value Function P6DR Port input external interrupt input or timer counter input Analog input or key-on wake-up input Port "0" output Port "1" output * * "0" "1" P6CR1 "0" "0" "1" "1" P6CR2 "1" "0" * *
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates "1" or "0" either of which can be selected.
Table 5-8 Values Read from P6DR and Register Programming
Conditions Values Read from P6DR P6CR1 "0" "0" "1" "1" P6CR2 "0" "1" "0" Output latch contents "0" Terminal input data
Page 59
5. I/O Ports
5.5 Port P6 (P67 to P60) TMP86FS23UG
Analog input AINDS SAIN P6CR2i P6CR2i input P6CR1i P6CR1i input Data input (P6DR) D Q D Q
Data output (P6DR) Control input STOP OUTEN STOPk Key on wake up Analog input AINDS SAIN P6CR2j P6CR2j input P6CR1j P6CR1j input Data input (P6DR)
D
Q
P6i Note 1: i = 0 to 3, j = 4 to 7, k = 2 to 5 Note 2: STOP is bit 7 in SYSCR1 Note 3: SAIN is AD input select signal. Note 4: STOPk is input select signal in a key on wake up.
D
Q
D
Q
Data output (P6DR) STOP OUTEN
D
Q
P6j
Figure 5-6 Port P6
Note 1: The port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by executing a bit manipulation instruction. Note 2: When used as an analog inport, be sure to clear the corresponding bit of P6CR2 to disable the port input. Note 3: Do not set the output mode (P6CR1 = "1" ) for the pin used as a analog input pin. Note 4: Pins not used for analog input can be used as I/O ports. During AD conversion, output instructions should not be executed to keep a precision. In addition, a variable signal should not be input to a port adjacent to the analog input during AD conversion.
Page 60
TMP86FS23UG
P6DR (0006H) R/W P6CR1 (000BH)
7 P67 AIN7 STOP5 7
6 P66 AIN6 STOP4 6
5 P65 AIN5 STOP3 5
4 P64 AIN4 STOP2 4
3 P63 AIN3
INT0
2 P62 AIN2 ECNT 2
1 P61 AIN1 ECIN 1
0 P60 AIN0 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) (Initial value: 0000 0000)
3
P6CR1
I/O control for port P6 (Specified for each bit)
0: Port input, Key on wake up input, Analog input, external interrupt input or timer counter input 1: Port output
R/W
P6CR2 (000CH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
P6CR2
P6 port input control (Specified for each bit)
0: Analog input or Key on wake up input 1: Port input , external interrupt input or timer counter input
R/W
Page 61
5. I/O Ports
5.6 Port P7 (P77 to P70) TMP86FS23UG
5.6 Port P7 (P77 to P70)
Port P7 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit. Port P7 is also used as a segment output of LCD. Input/output mode is specified by the P7 control register (P7CR). When used as an input port, the corresponding bit of P7CR and P7LCR should be cleared to "0". When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P7CR should be set to "1", and the respective P7LCR bit should be cleared to "0". When used as a segment pins of LCD, the respective bit of P7LCR should be set to "1". During reset, the output latch (P7DR), P7CR and P7LCR are initialized to "0". When the bit of P7CR and P7LCR is "0", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is a terminal input data. When the bit of P7CR is "0" and that of P7LCR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is always "0". When the bit of P7CR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is the value of P7DR. Table 5-9 Register Programming for Multi-function Ports
Programmed Value Function P7DR Port input Port "0" output Port "1" output LCD segment output * "0" "1" * P7CR "0" "1" "1" * P7LCR "0" "0" "0" "1"
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates "1" or "0" either of which can be selected.
Table 5-10 Values Read from P7DR and Register Programming
Conditions Values Read from P7DR P7CR "0" "0" "1" "1" P7LCR "0" "1" "0" Output latch contents Terminal input data "0"
STOP OUTEN P7LCRi input P7LCRi P7CRi input P7CRi Data input (P7DRi) Data output (P7DRi) LCD data output DQ Output latch P7i Note: i = 7 to 0 D Q D Q
Figure 5-7 Port P7
Page 62
TMP86FS23UG
P7DR (0007H) R/W P7LCR (0FA0H)
7 P77 SEG8 7
6 P76 SEG9 6
5 P75 SEG10 5
4 P74 SEG11 4
3 P73 SEG12 3
2 P72 SEG13 2
1 P71 SEG14 1
0 P70 SEG15 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P7LCR
Port P7/segment output control (set for each bit individually)
0: P7 input/output port 1: Segment output
R/W
P7CR (000DH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P7CR
P7 port input/output control (set for each bit individually)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
Note: The port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by executing a bit manipulation instruction.
Page 63
5. I/O Ports
5.7 Port P8 (P87 to P80) TMP86FS23UG
5.7 Port P8 (P87 to P80)
Port P8 is an 8-bit input/output port which can be configured as an input or an output in one-bit unit. Port P8 is also used as a segment output of LCD. Input/output mode is specified by the P8 control register (P8CR). When used as an input port, the corresponding bit of P8CR and P8LCR should be cleared to "0". When used as an output port, the corresponding bit of P8CR should be set to "1", and the respective P8LCR bit should be cleared to "0". When used as a segment pins of LCD, the respective bit of P8LCR should be set to "1". During reset, the output latch (P8DR), P8CR and P8LCR are initialized to "0". When the bit of P8CR and P8LCR is "0", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is a terminal input data. When the bit of P8CR is "0" and that of P8LCR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is always "0". When the bit of P8CR is "1", the corresponding bit data by read instruction is the value of P8DR. Table 5-11 Register Programming for Multi-function ports
Port Input Function P8DR Port input Port "0" output Port "1" output LCD segment output * "0" "1" * P8CR "0" "1" "1" * P8LCR "0" "0" "0" "1"
Note: Asterisk (*) indicates "1" or "0" either of which can be selected.
Table 5-12 Values Read from P8DR and Register Programming
Conditions Values Read from P8DR P8CR "0" "0" "1" "1" P8LCR "0" "1" "0" Output latch contents Terminal input data "0"
STOP OUTEN P8LCRi input P8LCRi P8CRi input P8CRi Data input (P8DRi) Data output (P8DRi) LCD data output DQ Output latch P8i Note: i = 7 to 0 D Q D Q
Figure 5-8 Port P8
Page 64
TMP86FS23UG
P8DR (0008H) R/W P8LCR (0FA1H)
7 P87 SEG0 7
6 P86 SEG1 6
5 P85 SEG2 5
4 P84 SEG3 4
3 P83 SEG4 3
2 P82 SEG5 2
1 P81 SEG6 1
0 P80 SEG7 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P8LCR
P8 port segment output control (Specified for each bit)
0: Input/Output port 1: LCD segment output
R/W
P8CR (0024H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P8CR
P8 port input/output control (Specified for each bit)
0: Input mode 1: Output mode
R/W
Note: The port placed in input mode reads the pin input state. Therefore, when the input and output modes are used together, the output latch contents for the port in input mode might be changed by executing a bit manipulation instruction.
Page 65
5. I/O Ports
5.7 Port P8 (P87 to P80) TMP86FS23UG
Page 66
TMP86FS23UG
6. Time Base Timer (TBT)
The time base timer generates time base for key scanning, dynamic displaying, etc. It also provides a time base timer interrupt (INTTBT).
6.1 Time Base Timer
6.1.1 Configuration
MPX
fc/223 or fs/215 fc/221 or fs/213 fc/216 or fs/28 fc/214 or fs/26 fc/213 or fs/25 fc/212 or fs/24 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/29 or fs/2
Source clock
Falling edge detector
IDLE0, SLEEP0 release request
INTTBT interrupt request
3 TBTCK TBTCR Time base timer control register TBTEN
Figure 6-1 Time Base Timer configuration 6.1.2 Control
Time Base Timer is controled by Time Base Timer control register (TBTCR). Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (0036H) (DVOEN) 6 (DVOCK) 5 4 (DV7CK) 3 TBTEN 2 1 TBTCK 0 (Initial Value: 0000 0000)
TBTEN
Time Base Timer enable / disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 fc/223 fc/221 fc/216 fc/2
14
DV7CK = 1 fs/215 fs/213 fs/28 fs/2
6
SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 Mode fs/215 fs/213 - - - - - - R/W
TBTCK
Time Base Timer interrupt Frequency select : [Hz]
010 011 100 101 110 111
fc/213 fc/2
12
fs/25 fs/2
4
fc/211 fc/2
9
fs/23 fs/2
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care
Page 67
6. Time Base Timer (TBT)
6.1 Time Base Timer TMP86FS23UG
Note 2: The interrupt frequency (TBTCK) must be selected with the time base timer disabled (TBTEN="0"). (The interrupt frequency must not be changed with the disable from the enable state.) Both frequency selection and enabling can be performed simultaneously.
Example :Set the time base timer frequency to fc/216 [Hz] and enable an INTTBT interrupt.
LD LD DI SET (EIRL) . 6 (TBTCR) , 00000010B (TBTCR) , 00001010B ; TBTCK 010 ; TBTEN 1 ; IMF 0
Table 6-1 Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency [Hz] TBTCK NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 1.91 7.63 244.14 976.56 1953.13 3906.25 7812.5 31250 NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 1 1 4 128 512 1024 2048 4096 16384 1 4 - - - - - - SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
6.1.3
Function
An INTTBT ( Time Base Timer Interrupt ) is generated on the first falling edge of source clock ( The divider output of the timing generato which is selected by TBTCK. ) after time base timer has been enabled. The divider is not cleared by the program; therefore, only the first interrupt may be generated ahead of the set interrupt period ( Figure 6-2 ).
Source clock
TBTCR
INTTBT Interrupt period Enable TBT
Figure 6-2 Time Base Timer Interrupt
Page 68
TMP86FS23UG
6.2 Divider Output (DVO)
Approximately 50% duty pulse can be output using the divider output circuit, which is useful for piezoelectric buzzer drive. Divider output is from DVO pin.
6.2.1
Configuration
Output latch Data output D Q DVO pin
fc/213 or fs/25 fc/212 or fs/24 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/210 or fs/22
MPX A B CY D S 2 DVOCK TBTCR Divider output control register (a) configuration DVOEN
Port output latch TBTCR
DVO pin output (b) Timing chart
Figure 6-3 Divider Output 6.2.2 Control
The Divider Output is controlled by the Time Base Timer Control Register. Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (0036H) DVOEN 6 DVOCK 5 4 (DV7CK) 3 (TBTEN) 2 1 (TBTCK) 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
DVOEN
Divider output enable / disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fs/24 fs/23 fs/22 SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 Mode fs/25 fs/24 fs/23 fs/22
R/W
DVOCK
Divider Output (DVO) frequency selection: [Hz]
00 01 10 11
fc/213 fc/212 fc/211 fc/210
R/W
Note: Selection of divider output frequency (DVOCK) must be made while divider output is disabled (DVOEN="0"). Also, in other words, when changing the state of the divider output frequency from enabled (DVOEN="1") to disable(DVOEN="0"), do not change the setting of the divider output frequency.
Page 69
6. Time Base Timer (TBT)
6.2 Divider Output (DVO) TMP86FS23UG
Example :1.95 kHz pulse output (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD LD
(TBTCR) , 00000000B (TBTCR) , 10000000B
; DVOCK "00" ; DVOEN "1"
Table 6-2 Divider Output Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Divider Output Frequency [Hz] DVOCK NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 00 01 10 11 1.953 k 3.906 k 7.813 k 15.625 k DV7CK = 1 1.024 k 2.048 k 4.096 k 8.192 k SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode 1.024 k 2.048 k 4.096 k 8.192 k
Page 70
TMP86FS23UG
7. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
The watchdog timer is a fail-safe system to detect rapidly the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops due to spurious noises or the deadlock conditions, and return the CPU to a system recovery routine. The watchdog timer signal for detecting malfunctions can be programmed only once as "reset request" or "interrupt request". Upon the reset release, this signal is initialized to "reset request". When the watchdog timer is not used to detect malfunctions, it can be used as the timer to provide a periodic interrupt.
Note: Care must be taken in system design since the watchdog timer functions are not be operated completely due to effect of disturbing noise.
7.1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Reset release
fc/2 or fs/2 fc/221 or fs/213 fc/219 or fs/211 fc/217 or fs/29
23 15
Selector
Binary counters Clock Clear 1 2 Overflow WDT output
R S Q Reset request INTWDT interrupt request
2
Interrupt request
Internal reset Q SR
WDTEN WDTT
Writing disable code
Writing clear code
WDTOUT
Controller
0034H WDTCR1
0035H WDTCR2
Watchdog timer control registers
Figure 7-1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Page 71
7. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
7.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP86FS23UG
7.2 Watchdog Timer Control
The watchdog timer is controlled by the watchdog timer control registers (WDTCR1 and WDTCR2). The watchdog timer is automatically enabled after the reset release.
7.2.1
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer
The CPU malfunction is detected, as shown below. 1. Set the detection time, select the output, and clear the binary counter. 2. Clear the binary counter repeatedly within the specified detection time. If the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops or the deadlock conditions occur for some reason, the watchdog timer output is activated by the binary-counter overflow unless the binary counters are cleared. When WDTCR1 is set to "1" at this time, the reset request is generated and then internal hardware is initialized. When WDTCR1 is set to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT) is generated. The watchdog timer temporarily stops counting in the STOP mode including the warm-up or IDLE/SLEEP mode, and automatically restarts (continues counting) when the STOP/IDLE/SLEEP mode is inactivated.
Note:The watchdog timer consists of an internal divider and a two-stage binary counter. When the clear code 4EH is written, only the binary counter is cleared, but not the internal divider. The minimum binary-counter overflow time, that depends on the timing at which the clear code (4EH) is written to the WDTCR2 register, may be 3/ 4 of the time set in WDTCR1. Therefore, write the clear code using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set to WDTCR1.
Example :Setting the watchdog timer detection time to 221/fc [s], and resetting the CPU malfunction detection
LD LD LD (WDTCR2), 4EH (WDTCR1), 00001101B (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters. : WDTT 10, WDTOUT 1 : Clears the binary counters (always clears immediately before and after changing WDTT).
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: :
LD
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters.
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: : LD (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters.
Page 72
TMP86FS23UG
Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1 (0034H) 7 6 5 (ATAS) 4 (ATOUT) 3 WDTEN 2 WDTT 1 0 WDTOUT (Initial value: **11 1001)
WDTEN
Watchdog timer enable/disable
0: Disable (Writing the disable code to WDTCR2 is required.) 1: Enable NORMAL1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 217/fs 215/fs 213/fs 211/fs SLOW1/2 mode 217/fs 215fs 213fs 211/fs
Write only
WDTT
Watchdog timer detection time [s]
00 01 10 11
225/fc 223/fc 221fc 219/fc
Write only
WDTOUT
Watchdog timer output select
0: Interrupt request 1: Reset request
Write only
Note 1: After clearing WDTOUT to "0", the program cannot set it to "1". Note 2: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 3: WDTCR1 is a write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions. If WDTCR1 is read, a don't care is read. Note 4: To activate the STOP mode, disable the watchdog timer or clear the counter immediately before entering the STOP mode. After clearing the counter, clear the counter again immediately after the STOP mode is inactivated. Note 5: To clear WDTEN, set the register in accordance with the procedures shown in "1.2.3 Watchdog Timer Disable".
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2 (0035H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write Watchdog timer control code
4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (Clear code) B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (Disable code) D2H: Enable assigning address trap area Others: Invalid
Write only
Note 1: The disable code is valid only when WDTCR1 = 0. Note 2: *: Don't care Note 3: The binary counter of the watchdog timer must not be cleared by the interrupt task. Note 4: Write the clear code 4EH using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set in WDTCR1.
7.2.2
Watchdog Timer Enable
Setting WDTCR1 to "1" enables the watchdog timer. Since WDTCR1 is initialized to "1" during reset, the watchdog timer is enabled automatically after the reset release.
Page 73
7. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
7.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP86FS23UG
7.2.3
Watchdog Timer Disable
To disable the watchdog timer, set the register in accordance with the following procedures. Setting the register in other procedures causes a malfunction of the microcontroller. 1. Set the interrupt master flag (IMF) to "0". 2. Set WDTCR2 to the clear code (4EH). 3. Set WDTCR1 to "0". 4. Set WDTCR2 to the disable code (B1H).
Note:While the watchdog timer is disabled, the binary counters of the watchdog timer are cleared.
Example :Disabling the watchdog timer
DI LD LDW (WDTCR2), 04EH (WDTCR1), 0B101H : IMF 0 : Clears the binary coutner : WDTEN 0, WDTCR2 Disable code
Table 7-1 Watchdog Timer Detection Time (Example: fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz) Watchdog Timer Detection Time[s]
WDTT DV7CK = 0 00 01 10 11 2.097 524.288 m 131.072 m 32.768 m NORMAL1/2 mode DV7CK = 1 4 1 250 m 62.5 m SLOW mode 4 1 250 m 62.5 m
7.2.4
Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)
When WDTCR1 is cleared to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt request (INTWDT) is generated by the binary-counter overflow. A watchdog timer interrupt is the non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF). When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new watchdog timer interrupt is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. Therefore, if watchdog timer interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. To generate a watchdog timer interrupt, set the stack pointer before setting WDTCR1.
Example :Setting watchdog timer interrupt
LD LD SP, 083FH (WDTCR1), 00001000B : Sets the stack pointer : WDTOUT 0
Page 74
TMP86FS23UG
7.2.5
Watchdog Timer Reset
When a binary-counter overflow occurs while WDTCR1 is set to "1", a watchdog timer reset request is generated. When a watchdog timer reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When a watchdog timer reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
219/fc [s] 217/fc Clock Binary counter Overflow INTWDT interrupt request
(WDTCR1= "0")
(WDTT=11) 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0
Internal reset
(WDTCR1= "1")
A reset occurs Write 4EH to WDTCR2
Figure 7-2 Watchdog Timer Interrupt
Page 75
7. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
7.3 Address Trap TMP86FS23UG
7.3 Address Trap
The Watchdog Timer Control Register 1 and 2 share the addresses with the control registers to generate address traps. Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1 (0034H) 7 6 5 ATAS 4 ATOUT 3 (WDTEN) 2 (WDTT) 1 0 (WDTOUT) (Initial value: **11 1001)
ATAS
Select address trap generation in the internal RAM area Select opertion at address trap
0: Generate no address trap 1: Generate address traps (After setting ATAS to "1", writing the control code D2H to WDTCR2 is reguired) 0: Interrupt request 1: Reset request
Write only
ATOUT
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2 (0035H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write Watchdog timer control code and address trap area control code
D2H: Enable address trap area selection (ATRAP control code) 4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (WDT clear code) B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (WDT disable code) Others: Invalid
Write only
7.3.1
Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS)
WDTCR1 specifies whether or not to generate address traps in the internal RAM area. To execute an instruction in the internal RAM area, clear WDTCR1 to "0". To enable the WDTCR1 setting, set WDTCR1 and then write D2H to WDTCR2. Executing an instruction in the SFR or DBR area generates an address trap unconditionally regardless of the setting in WDTCR1.
7.3.2
Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT)
When an address trap is generated, either the interrupt request or the reset request can be selected by WDTCR1.
7.3.3
Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
While WDTCR1 is "0", if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1 is "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) will be generated. An address trap interrupt is a non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF). When an address trap interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new address trap is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. Therefore, if address trap interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. To generate address trap interrupts, set the stack pointer beforehand.
Page 76
TMP86FS23UG
7.3.4
Address Trap Reset
While WDTCR1 is "1", if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1 is "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be generated. When an address trap reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When an address trap reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
Page 77
7. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
7.3 Address Trap TMP86FS23UG
Page 78
8.1 Configuration
fc/212 or fs/24
TREG1B Y S 2 SGEDG 1 Window pulse generator TC1M 2
INTTC1
fc/213 or fs/25
fc/214 or fs/26
A B C
PWM6/PDO6/PPG6
WGPSCK
TC6OUT
1 Edge detector C B A Y S
Pulse width measurement mode
P33 Pin
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
ECNT Pin
TC1S
TC1CK
TC1M
TC1C
TMP86FS23UG
TC1CR1
SEG SGP SGEDG WGPSCK TC6OUT
Figure 8-1 Timer/Counter1
10 11 00 S CMP Y CLEAR signal 18- bit up-counter H
Timer/Event count modes Frequency measurement mode
Page 79
Y C D E F G B A 3 22 1 12121 TC1CR2
SEG 1
ECIN Pin
Edge detector
F/F
1
1 TC1SR TREG1AL TREG1AM TREG1AH
fs/215 or fc/223 fs/25 or fc/213 fs/23 or fc/211 fc/27 fc/23 fs fc
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.2 Control TMP86FS23UG
8.2 Control
The Timer/counter 1 is controlled by timer/counter 1 control registers (TC1CR1/TC1CR2), an 18-bit timer register (TREG1A), and an 8-bit internal window gate pulse setting register (TREG1B). Timer register
7 TREG1AH (0012H) R/W - 6 - 5 - 4 - 3 - 2 - 1 0 (Initial value: 00)
TREG1AH
7 TREG1AM (0011H) R/W
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TREG1AM
7 TREG1AL (0010H) R/W
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TREG1AL
7 TREG1B (0013H)
6 Ta
5
4
3
2 Tb
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
NORMAL1/2,IDLE1/2 modes WGPSCK DV7CK=0 Setting "H" level period of the window gate pulse 00 01 10 00 01 10 (16 - Ta) x 212/fc (16 - Ta) x 2 /fc (16 - Ta) x 214/fc
13
DV7CK=1 (16 - Ta) x 24/fs (16 - Ta) x 2 /fs (16 - Ta) x 26/fs
5
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes (16 - Ta) x 24/fs (16 - Ta) x 25/fs (16 - Ta) x 26/fs (16 - Tb) x 24/fs (16 - Tb) x 25/fs (16 - Tb) x 26/fs R/W
Ta
Tb
Setting "L" level period of the window gate pulse
(16 - Tb) x 212/fc (16 - Tb) x 213/fc (16 - Tb) x 214/fc
(16 - Tb) x 24/fs (16 - Tb) x 25/fs (16 - Tb) x 26/fs
Page 80
TMP86FS23UG
Timer/counter 1 control register 1
7 TC1CR1 (0014H) TC1C 6 TC1S 5 4 3 TC1CK 2 1 TC1M 0 (Initial value: 1000 1000)
TC1C
Counter/overfow flag controll
0: 1: 00: 10: *1:
Clear Counter/overflow flag ( "1" is automatically set after clearing.) Not clear Counter/overflow flag Stop and counter clear and overflow flag clear Start Reserved NORMAL1/2,IDLE1/2 modes DV7CK="0" DV7CK="1" fc fs fs/215 fs/25 fs/23 fc/27 fc/23 SLOW1/2 mode fc fs/215 fs/25 fs/23 SLEEP1/2 mode fc fs/215 fs/25 fs/23 -
R/W
TC1S
TC1 start control
R/W
TC1CK
TC1 source clock select
000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: 00: 01: 10: 11:
fc fs fc/223 fc/2
13
R/W
fc/211 fc/2
7
fc/23
External clock (ECIN pin input) Timer/Event counter mode Reserved Pulse width measurement mode Frequency measurement mode
TC1M
TC1 mode select
R/W
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz] fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz] * ; Don't care Note 2: Writing to the low-byte of the timer register 1A (TREG1AL, TREG1AM), the compare function is inhibited until the highbyte (TREG1AH) is written. Note 3: Set the mode and source clock, and edge (selection) when the TC1 stops (TC1S=00). Note 4: "fc" can be selected as the source clock only in the timer mode during SLOW mode and in the pulse width measurement mode during NORMAL 1/2 or IDLE 1/2 mode. Note 5: When a read instruction is executed to the timer register (TREG1A), the counter immediate value, not the register set value, is read out. Therefore it is impossible to read out the written value of TREG1A. To read the counter value, the read instruction should be executed when the counter stops to avoid reading unstable value. Note 6: Set the timer register (TREG1A) to 1. Note 7: When using the timer mode and pulse width measurement mode, set TC1CK (TC1 source clock select) to internal clock. Note 8: When using the event counter mode, set TC1CK (TC1 source clock select) to external clock. Note 9: Because the read value is different from the written value, do not use read-modify-write instructions to TREG1A. Note 10:fc/27, fc/23can not be used as source clock in SLOW/SLEEP mode. Note 11:The read data of bits 7 to 2 in TREG1AH are always "0". (Data "1" can not be written.)
Page 81
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.2 Control TMP86FS23UG
Timer/Counter 1 control register 2
7 TC1CR2 (0015H) SEG 6 SGP 5 4 SGEDG 3 WGPSCK 2 1 TC6OUT 0 "0" (Initial value: 0000 000*)
SEG
External input clock (ECIN) edge select
0: 1: 00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
Counts at the falling edge Counts at the both (falling/rising) edges ECNT input Internal window gate pulse (TREG1B) PWM6/PDO6/PPG6 (TC6)output Reserved Interrupts at the falling edge Interrupts at the falling/rising edges NORMAL1/2,IDLE1/2 modes DV7CK="0" DV7CK="1" 24/fs 2 /fs 26/fs Reserved
5
R/W
SGP
Window gate pulse select
R/W
SGEDG
Window gate pulse interrupt edge select
SLOW1/2 mode 24/fs 2 /fs 26/fs Reserved
5
SLEEP1/2 mode 24/fs 25/fs 26/fs Reserved R/W R/W
WGPSCK
Window gate pulse source clock select
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
212/fc 2 /fc 214/fc Reserved Output to P33 No output to P33
13
TC6OUT
TC6 output (PWM6/PDO6/PPG6) external output select
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz] fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz] *; Don't care Note 2: Set the mode, source clock, and edge (selection) when the TC1 stops (TC1S = 00). Note 3: If there is no need to use PWM6/PDO6/PPG6 as window gate pulse of TC1 always write "0" to TC6OUT. Note 4: Make sure to write TC1CR2 "0" to bit 0 in TC1CR2. Note 5: When using the event counter mode or pulse width measurement mode, set SEG to "0".
Page 82
TMP86FS23UG
TC1 status register
7 TC1SR (0016H) HECF 6 HEOVF 5 "0" 4 "0" 3 "0" 2 "0" 1 "0" 0 "0" (Initial value: 0000 0000)
HECF
Operating Status monitor
0: 1: 0: 1:
Stop (during Tb) or disable Under counting (during Ta) No overflow Overflow status
Read only
HEOVF
Counter overflow monitor
8.3 Function
TC1 has four operating modes. The timer mode of the TC1 is used at warm-up when switching form SLOW mode to NORMAL2 mode.
8.3.1
Timer mode
In this mode, counting up is performed using the internal clock. The contents of TREGIA are compared with the contents of up-counter. If a match is found, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated, and the counter is cleared. Counting up resumes after the counter is cleared.
Table 8-1 Source clock (internal clock) of Timer/Counter 1
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode SLOW Mode DV7CK = 0 fc/223 [Hz] fc/213 fc/211 fc/27 fc/23 fc fs DV7CK = 1 fs/215 [Hz] fs/25 fs/23 fc/27 fc/23 fc fs fs/215 [Hz] fs/25 fs/23 fc (Note) fs/215 [Hz] fs/25 fs/23 0.52 s 512 ms 128 ms 8 ms 0.5 ms 62.5 ns SLEEP Mode fc = 16 MHz Resolution fs =32.768 kHz 1s 0.98 ms 244 ms 30.5 ms Maximum Time Setting fc = 16 MHz 38.2 h 2.2 min 0.6 min 2.1 s 131.1 ms 16.4 ms fs =32.768 kHz 72.8 h 4.3 min 1.07 min 8s
Note: When fc is selected for the source clock in SLOW mode, the lower bits 11 of TREG1A is invalid, and a match of the upper bits 7 makes interrupts.
Page 83
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86FS23UG
Command Start
Internal clock
Up counter
0
1
2
3
4
n-1
n0
1
2
3
4
5
6
TREG1A
n
Match detect Counter clear
INTTC1 interrupt
Figure 8-2 Timing chart for timer mode 8.3.2 Event Counter mode
It is a mode to count up at the falling edge of the ECIN pin input. When using this mode, set TC1CR1 to the external clock and then set TC1CR2 to "0" (Both edges can not be used). The countents of TREG1A are compared with the contents of up-counter. If a match is found, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated, and the counter is cleared. Counting up resumes for ECIN pin input edge each after the counter is cleared. The maximum applied frequency is fc/24 [Hz] in NORMAL 1/2 or IDLE 1/2 mode and fs/24[Hz] in SLOW or SLEEP mode . Two or more machine cycles are required for both the "H" and "L" levels of the pulse width.
Start
ECIN pin input
Up counter
0
1
2
n-1
n
0
1
2
TREG1A
n
Match Detect Counter clear
INTTC1 interrupt
Figure 8-3 Event counter mode timing chart
Page 84
TMP86FS23UG
8.3.3
Pulse Width Measurement mode
In this mode, pulse widths are counted on the falling edge of logical AND-ed pulse between ECIN pin input (window pulse) and the internal clock. When using this mode, set TC1CR1 to suitable internal clock and then set TC1CR2 to "0" (Both edges can not be used). An INTTC1 interrupt is generated when the ECIN input detects the falling edge of the window pulse or both rising and falling edges of the window pulse, that can be selected by TC1CR2. The contents of TREG1A should be read while the count is stopped (ECIN pin is low), then clear the counter using TC1CR1 (Normally, execute these process in the interrupt program). When the counter is not cleared by TC1CR1, counting-up resumes from previous stopping value. When up counter is counted up from 3FFFFH to 00000H, an overflow occurs. At that time, TC1SR is set to "1". TC1SR remains the previous data until the counter is required to be cleared by TC1CR1.
Note:In pulse width measurement mode, if TC1CR1 is written to "00" while ECIN input is "1", INTTC1 interrupt occurs. According to the following step, when timer counter is stopped, INTTC1 interrupt latch should be cleared to "0".
Example :
TC1STOP : | DI CLR LD LD SET EI | | (EIRL). 7 (TC1CR1), 00011010B (ILL), 01111111B (EIRL). 7 | ; Clear IMF ; Clear bit7 of EIRL ; Stop timer couter 1 ; Clear bit7 of ILL ; Set bit7 of EIRL ; Set IMF
Note 1: When SGEDG (window gate pulse interrupt edge select) is set to both edges and ECIN pin input is "1" in the pulse width measurement mode, an INTTC1 interrupt is generated by setting TC1S (TC1 start control) to "10" (start). Note 2: In the pulse width measurement mode, HECF (operating status monitor) cannot used. Note 3: Because the up counter is counted on the falling edge of logical AND-ed pulse (between ECIN pin input and the internal clock), if ECIN input becomes falling edge while internal source clock is "H" level, the up counter stops plus "1".
Count Start
Count Stop
Count Start
ECIN pin input
Internal clock
AND-ed pulse (Internal signal) Up counter 0 1 2 3 n-2 n-1 n n+1
Read Clear Interrupt
0
1
2
INTTC1 interrupt
TC1CR1
Figure 8-4 Pulse width measurement mode timing chart
Page 85
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86FS23UG
8.3.4
Frequency Measurement mode
In this mode, the frequency of ECIN pin input pulse is measured. When using this mode, set TC1CR1 to the external clock. The edge of the ECIN input pulse is counted during "H" level of the window gate pulse selected by TC1CR2. To use ECNT input as a window gate pulse, TC1CR2 should be set to "00". An INTTC1 interrupt is generated on the falling edge or both the rising/falling edges of the window gate pulse, that can be selected by TC1CR2. In the interrupt service program, read the contents of TREG1A while the count is stopped (window gate pulse is low), then clear the counter using TC1CR1. When the counter is not cleared, counting up resumes from previous stopping value. The window pulse status can be monitored by TC1SR. When up counter is counted up from 3FFFFH to 00000H, an overflow occurs. At that time, TC1SR is set to "1". TC1SR remains the previous data until the counter is required to be cleared by TC1CR1. Using TC6 output (PWM6/PDO6/PPG6) for the window gate pulse, external output of PWM6/PDO6/PPG6 to P33 can be controlled using TC1CR2. Zero-clearing TC1CR2 outputs PWM6/PDO6/ PPG6 to P33; setting 1 in TC1CR2 does not output PWM6/PDO6/PPG6 to P33. (TC1CR2 is used to control output to P33 only. Thus, use the timer counter 6 control register to operate/stop PWM6/PDO6/PPG6.)
When the internal window gate pulse is selected, the window gate pulse is set as follows. Table 8-2 Internal window gate pulse setting time
NORMAL1/2,IDLE1/2 modes WGPSCK DV7CK=0 Setting "H" level period of the window gate pulse 00 01 10 00 01 10 (16 - Ta) x 212/fc (16 - Ta) x 213/fc
14
DV7CK=1 (16 - Ta) x 24/fs (16 - Ta) x 25/fs
6
SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes (16 - Ta) x 24/fs (16 - Ta) x 25/fs (16 - Ta) x 26/fs (16 - Tb) x 24/fs (16 - Tb) x 25/fs (16 - Tb) x 26/fs R/W
Ta
(16 - Ta) x 2 /fc (16 - Tb) x 212/fc (16 - Tb) x 2 /fc (16 - Tb) x 214/fc
13
(16 - Ta) x 2 /fs (16 - Tb) x 24/fs (16 - Tb) x 2 /fs (16 - Tb) x 26/fs
5
Tb
Setting "L" level period of the window gate pulse
The internal window gate pulse consists of "H" level period (Ta) that is counting time and "L" level period (Tb) that is counting stop time. Ta or Tb can be individually set by TREG1B. One cycle contains Ta + Tb.
Note 1: Because the internal window gate pulse is generated in synchronization with the internal divider, it may be delayed for a maximum of one cycle of the source clock (WGPSCK) immediately after start of the timer. Note 2: Set the internal window gate pulse when the timer counter is not operating or during the Tb period. When Tb is overwritten during the Tb period, the update is valid from the next Tb period. Note 3: In case of TC1CR2 = "1", if window gate pulse becomes falling edge, the up counter stops plus "1" regardless of ECIN input level. Therefore, if ECIN is always "H" or "L" level, count value becomes "1". Note 4: In case of TC1CR2 = "0", because the up counter is counted on the falling edge of logical AND-ed pulse (between ECIN pin input and window gate pulse), if window gate pulse becomes falling edge while ECIN input is "H" level, the up counter stops plus "1". Therefore, if ECIN input is always "H" level, count value becomes "1".
Page 86
TMP86FS23UG
Table 8-3 Table Setting Ta and Tb (WGPSCK = 10, fc = 16 MHz)
Setting Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Setting time 16.38ms 15.36ms 14.34ms 13.31ms 12.29ms 11.26ms 10.24ms 9.22ms Setting Value 8 9 A B C D E F Setting time 8.19ms 7.17ms 6.14ms 5.12ms 4.10ms 3.07ms 2.05ms 1.02ms
Table 8-4 Table Setting Ta and Tb (WGPSCK = 10, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Setting Valuen 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Setting time 31.25ms 29.30ms 27.34ms 25.39ms 23.44ms 21.48ms 19.53ms 17.58ms Setting Value 8 9 A B C D E F Setting time 15.63ms 13.67ms 11.72ms 9.77ms 7.81ms 5.86ms 3.91ms 1.95ms
Page 87
8. 18-Bit Timer/Counter (TC1)
8.3 Function TMP86FS23UG
ECIN pin input Window gate pulse AND-ed pulse (Internal signal) Up counter 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Ta
Tb
Ta
INTTC1 interrupt
Read Clear
TC1CR1 a) TC1CR2 = "0"
TC1CR2
ECIN pin input Window gate pulse Up counter 0
Ta
Tb
Ta
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12
INTTC1 interrupt
Read Clear
TC1CR1 a) TC1CR2 = "1"
Figure 8-5 Timing chart for the frequency measurement mode (Window gate pulse falling interrupt)
Page 88
TMP86FS23UG
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23 INTTC4 interrupt request
fc/2 5 fc/2 fc/23
fs
7
fc/2 fc
TC4 pin TC4M TC4S TFF4
A B C D E F G H S
Y
A B S
Y
Clear
8-bit up-counter
TC4S
PDO, PPG mode
A 16-bit mode
16-bit mode
Y B S S A Y B
Timer, Event Counter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F4
PDO4/PWM4/ PPG4 pin
TC4CK TC4CR TTREG4 PWREG4
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
TFF4
PDO, PWM, PPG mode
16-bit mode
TC3S
PWM mode
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/27 5 fc/2 3 fc/2
fs
TC3 pin TC3M TC3S TFF3
fc/2 fc
A B C D E F G H S
Clear Y
8-bit up-counter Overflow 16-bit mode PDO mode
INTTC3 interrupt request
16-bit mode Timer, Event Couter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F3
PDO3/PWM3/ pin
TC3CK TC3CR TTREG3 PWREG3
PWM mode
DecodeEN
TFF3
PDO, PWM mode 16-bit mode
Figure 9-1 8-Bit TimerCouter 3, 4
Page 89
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
9.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 3 is controlled by the TimerCounter 3 control register (TC3CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG3, PWREG3). TimerCounter 3 Timer Register
TTREG3 (001CH) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG3 (0028H) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG3) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG3) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 3 Control Register
TC3CR (0018H) 7 TFF3 6 5 TC3CK 4 3 TC3S 2 1 TC3M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF3
Time F/F3 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - fc (Note 8)
R/W
000 001 TC3CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC3S TC3 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: TC3M TC3M operating mode select 010: 011: 1**:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
R/W
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit mode (Each mode is selectable with TC4M.) Reserved
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC3S= 1 0), do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings. To start the timer operation (TC3S= 0 1), TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 can be programmed. Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC4CR, where TC3M must be fixed to 011. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CK. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC4CR and TC4CR, respectively. Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 9-1 and Table 9-2.
Page 90
TMP86FS23UG
Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 93. Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 91
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
The TimerCounter 4 is controlled by the TimerCounter 4 control register (TC4CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG4 and PWREG4). TimerCounter 4 Timer Register
TTREG4 (001DH) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG4 (0029H) R/ W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG4) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG4) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 4 Control Register
TC4CR (0019H) 7 TFF4 6 5 TC4CK 4 3 TC4S 2 1 TC4M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF4
Timer F/F4 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc TC4 pin input
3
R/W SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - - R/W
000 001 TC4CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC4S TC4 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: TC4M TC4M operating mode select 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc
3
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode Reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode Warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit PPG mode
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC4S= 1 0), do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings. To start the timer operation (TC4S= 0 1), TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 can be programmed. Note 4: When TC4M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC4 overflow signal regardless of the TC3CK setting. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC4M, where TC3CR must be set to 011.
Page 92
TMP86FS23UG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CR. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC4S and TFF4, respectively. Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 9-1 and Table 9-2. Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 93.
Table 9-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input - - - - - TC4 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC3CK). Note 2: : Available source clock
Table 9-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input - - - - - TC4 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC3CK). Note2: : Available source clock
Page 93
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
Table 9-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode 8-bit timer/event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer/event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 1 (TTREGn) 255 1 (TTREGn) 255 2 (PWREGn) 254 1 (TTREG4, 3) 65535 256 (TTREG4, 3) 65535 2 (PWREG4, 3) 65534 1 (PWREG4, 3) < (TTREG4, 3) 65535 16-bit PPG and (PWREG4, 3) + 1 < (TTREG4, 3) Register Value
Note: n = 3 to 4
Page 94
TMP86FS23UG
9.3 Function
The TimerCounter 3 and 4 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 (TC3, 4) are cascadable to form a 16bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
9.3.1
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 9-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 3, 4 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - Resolution Repeated Cycle
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns
244.14 s - - -
32.6 ms 2.0 ms 510 s 127.5 s
62.3 ms - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (TimerCounter4, fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD DI SET EI LD LD (TC4CR), 00010000B (TC4CR), 00011000B : Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode. : Starts TC4. (EIRH). 4 : Enables INTTC4 interrupt. (TTREG4), 0AH : Sets the timer register (80 s/27/fc = 0AH).
Page 95
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
TC4CR
Internal Source Clock Counter
TTREG4
1
2
3
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 9-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC4) 9.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
TC4CR TC4 pin input
Counter
TTREG4
0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 9-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC4) 9.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin. In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0. To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 96
TMP86FS23UG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC4 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port LD LD LD (TTREG4), 3DH (TC4CR), 00010001B (TC4CR), 00011001B : 1/1024/27/fc/2 = 3DH : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode. : Starts TC4.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR setting upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Page 97
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Write of "1"
Internal source clock n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 3 0
Counter
0
1
2
Figure 9-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
Match detect Match detect Match detect
Page 98
TTREG4
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F4
Set F/F
PDO4 pin
INTTC4 interrupt request
Held at the level when the timer is stopped
TMP86FS23UG
TMP86FS23UG
9.3.4
8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.) Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode. Note 4: j = 3, 4
Table 9-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
Resolution SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - -
Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 32.8 ms 2.05 ms 512 s 128 s 7.81 ms 32 s 16 s fs = 32.768 kHz 62.5 ms - - - 7.81 ms - -
DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
Page 99
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Internal source clock n
Write to PWREG4
Counter
0
1
n+1
FF
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
m
m+1
FF
0
1
p
Write to PWREG4
PWREG4
? Shift Shift m
Match detect
n
m
p Shift p
Match detect Match detect
Figure 9-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
Page 100
n One cycle period m
Shift
Shift registar
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F4
PWM4 pin
n
p
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86FS23UG
TMP86FS23UG
9.3.5
16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the upper byte and lower byte in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 9-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD (TC3CR), 13H :Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). : Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer. (EIRH). 4 : Enables INTTC4 interrupt. (TTREG3), 927CH : Sets the timer register (300 ms/27/fc = 927CH).
LD LD
(TC4CR), 04H (TC4CR), 0CH
TC4CR
Internal source clock Counter
TTREG3 (Lower byte) TTREG4 (Upper byte)
0
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
0
?
n
?
m
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 9-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 101
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
9.3.6
16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the TC3 pin. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit event counter. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC3 pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fs/24 in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Program the lower byte (TTREG3), and upper byte (TTREG4) in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
9.3.7
16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWM4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4 logic level.) Since PWREG4 and 3 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to PWREG4 and 3 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG4 and 3 during a run of the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG4 and 3. While the timer is stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG4 and 3. Set the lower byte (PWREG3) and upper byte (PWREG3) in this order to program PWREG4 and 3. (Programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) If executing the read instruction to PWREG4 and 3 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in PWREG4 and 3. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG4 and 3, reading data of PWREG4 and 3 is previous value until INTTC4 is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG4 and 3 immediately after the INTTC4 interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC4 interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR after the timer is stopped. Do not program TC4CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing thePWM4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
Page 102
TMP86FS23UG
CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TC4CR).7 : Sets the PWM4 pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM4 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 9-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms 2 s fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - - 2s - -
8.2 ms 4.1 ms
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LD (PWREG3), 07D0H (TC3CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal generation mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC4CR), 056H (TC4CR), 05EH
Page 103
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Internal source clock an
Write to PWREG3
Counter
0
1
an+1
FFFF
0
1
an
an+1
FFFF
0
1
bm bm+1
Write to PWREG3
FFFF
0
1
cp
PWREG3 (Lower byte)
?
Write to PWREG4
n
m
p
Write to PWREG4
Figure 9-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 104
b Shift Shift bm
Match detect an One cycle period bm
PWREG4 (Upper byte)
?
a
c Shift cp
Match detect Match detect
Shift
16-bit shift register
?
an
Match detect
Timer F/F4
PWM4 pin
an
cp
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86FS23UG
TMP86FS23UG
9.3.8
16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fc/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PPG4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4.) Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG3 TTREG4, PWREG3 PWREG4) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LDW LD (PWREG3), 07D0H (TTREG3), 8002H (TC3CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the cycle period. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PPG mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC4CR), 057H (TC4CR), 05FH
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi. Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR after the timer is stopped. Do not change TC4CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PPG4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer CLR (TC4CR).7: Sets the PPG4 pin to the high level Note 3: i = 3, 4
Page 105
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Write of "0"
Internal source clock 1 mn mn+1 qr-1 qr 0 1 mn mn+1 1 qr-1 qr 0 mn mn+1 0
Counter
0
PWREG3 (Lower byte)
?
n
Figure 9-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC40)
Page 106
Match detect Match detect Match detect mn mn
PWREG4 (Upper byte)
?
m
Match detect
Match detect
TTREG3 (Lower byte)
?
r
TTREG4 (Upper byte)
?
q F/F clear Held at the level when the timer stops
mn
Timer F/F4
PPG4 pin
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86FS23UG
TMP86FS23UG
9.3.9
Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit TimerCouter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG4 and 3 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. Note 3: i = 3, 4
9.3.9.1
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2 to 1 to switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock.
Table 9-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Maximum Time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = 0100H) 7.81 ms Maximum Time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = FF00H) 1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR SET (TC4CR).3 : (TC4CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops TC4 and 3. : SYSCR2 1 (Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.) (EIRH). 4 (SYSCR2).6 (TC3CR), 43H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 8000H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 : Enables the INTTC4. : IMF 1 : Starts TC4 and 3.
CLR RETI : VINTTC4: DW
(SYSCR2).7
: PINTTC4 : INTTC4 vector table
Page 107
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
9.3.9.2
High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock.
Table 9-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time (TTREG4, 3 = 0100H) 16 s Maximum time (TTREG4, 3 = FF00H) 4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET LD LD LD (SYSCR2).7 (TC3CR), 63H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 0F800H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 (EIRH). 4 : Enables the INTTC4. : IMF 1 (TC4CR).3 : (TC4CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops the TC4 and 3. : SYSCR2 0 (Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the low-frequency clock.) : Starts the TC4 and 3.
DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR CLR
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
RETI : VINTTC4: DW : PINTTC4 : INTTC4 vector table
Page 108
TMP86FS23UG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23 INTTC6 interrupt request
fc/2 5 fc/2 fc/23
fs
7
fc/2 fc
TC6 pin TC6M TC6S TFF6
A B C D E F G H S
Y
A B S
Y
Clear
8-bit up-counter
TC6S
PDO, PPG mode
A 16-bit mode
16-bit mode
Y B S S A Y B
Timer, Event Counter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F6
PDO6/PWM6/ PPG6 pin
TC6CK TC6CR TTREG6 PWREG6
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
TFF6
PDO, PWM, PPG mode
16-bit mode
TC5S
PWM mode
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/27 5 fc/2 3 fc/2
fs
TC5 pin TC5M TC5S TFF5
fc/2 fc
A B C D E F G H S
Clear Y
8-bit up-counter Overflow 16-bit mode PDO mode
INTTC5 interrupt request
16-bit mode Timer, Event Couter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F5
PDO5/PWM5/ pin
TC5CK TC5CR TTREG5 PWREG5
PWM mode
DecodeEN
TFF5
PDO, PWM mode 16-bit mode
Figure 10-1 8-Bit TimerCouter 5, 6
Page 109
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
10.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 5 is controlled by the TimerCounter 5 control register (TC5CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG5, PWREG5). TimerCounter 5 Timer Register
TTREG5 (001EH) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG5 (002AH) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG5) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG5) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 5 Control Register
TC5CR (001AH) 7 TFF5 6 5 TC5CK 4 3 TC5S 2 1 TC5M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF5
Time F/F5 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC5 pin input SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - fc (Note 8)
R/W
000 001 TC5CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC5S TC5 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: TC5M TC5M operating mode select 010: 011: 1**:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
R/W
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit mode (Each mode is selectable with TC6M.) Reserved
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC5S= 1 0), do not change the TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 settings. To start the timer operation (TC5S= 0 1), TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 can be programmed. Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC6CR, where TC5M must be fixed to 011. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CK. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC6CR and TC6CR, respectively. Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 10-1 and Table 10-2.
Page 110
TMP86FS23UG
Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 103. Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 111
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
The TimerCounter 6 is controlled by the TimerCounter 6 control register (TC6CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG6 and PWREG6). TimerCounter 6 Timer Register
TTREG6 (001FH) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG6 (002BH) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG6) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG6) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 6 Control Register
TC6CR (001BH) 7 TFF6 6 5 TC6CK 4 3 TC6S 2 1 TC6M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF6
Timer F/F6 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc TC6 pin input
3
R/W SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - - R/W
000 001 TC6CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC6S TC6 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: TC6M TC6M operating mode select 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc
3
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode Reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode Warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit PPG mode
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC6S= 1 0), do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings. To start the timer operation (TC6S= 0 1), TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 can be programmed. Note 4: When TC6M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC6 overflow signal regardless of the TC5CK setting. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC6M, where TC5CR must be set to 011.
Page 112
TMP86FS23UG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CR. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC6S and TFF6, respectively. Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 10-1 and Table 10-2. Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 103. Note 9: To use the PDO, PWM or PPG mode, a pulse is not output from the timer output pin when TC1CR2 is set to 1. To output a pulse from the timer output pin, clear TC1CR2 to 0.
Table 10-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/2 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - -
3
fc/27
fc/25
fc/23
fs
fc/2
fc
TC5 pin input - - - - -
TC6 pin input - - - - - - - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC5CK). Note 2: : Available source clock
Table 10-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC5 pin input - - - - - TC6 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC5CK). Note2: : Available source clock
Page 113
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
Table 10-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode 8-bit timer/event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer/event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 1 (TTREGn) 255 1 (TTREGn) 255 2 (PWREGn) 254 1 (TTREG6, 5) 65535 256 (TTREG6, 5) 65535 2 (PWREG6, 5) 65534 1 (PWREG6, 5) < (TTREG6, 5) 65535 16-bit PPG and (PWREG6, 5) + 1 < (TTREG6, 5) Register Value
Note: n = 5 to 6
Page 114
TMP86FS23UG
10.3 Function
The TimerCounter 5 and 6 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 (TC5, 6) are cascadable to form a 16bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
10.3.1 8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 10-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 5, 6 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - Resolution Repeated Cycle
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns
244.14 s - - -
32.6 ms 2.0 ms 510 s 127.5 s
62.3 ms - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (TimerCounter6, fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD DI SET EI LD LD (TC6CR), 00010000B (TC6CR), 00011000B : Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode. : Starts TC6. (EIRH). 5 : Enables INTTC6 interrupt. (TTREG6), 0AH : Sets the timer register (80 s/27/fc = 0AH).
Page 115
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
TC6CR
Internal Source Clock Counter
TTREG6
1
2
3
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 10-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC6) 10.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5, 6)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
TC6CR TC6 pin input
Counter
TTREG6
0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 10-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC6) 10.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC5, 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin. In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0. To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 116
TMP86FS23UG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC6 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port LD LD LD (TTREG6), 3DH (TC6CR), 00010001B (TC6CR), 00011001B : 1/1024/27/fc/2 = 3DH : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode. : Starts TC6.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR setting upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Page 117
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Write of "1"
Internal source clock n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 3 0
Figure 10-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
Match detect Match detect Match detect
Page 118
Counter
0
1
2
TTREG6
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F6
Set F/F
PDO6 pin
INTTC6 interrupt request
Held at the level when the timer is stopped
TMP86FS23UG
TMP86FS23UG
10.3.4 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5, 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.) Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode. Note 4: j = 5, 6
Table 10-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
Resolution SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - -
Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 32.8 ms 2.05 ms 512 s 128 s 7.81 ms 32 s 16 s fs = 32.768 kHz 62.5 ms - - - 7.81 ms - -
DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
Page 119
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Internal source clock n
Write to PWREG4
Counter
0
1
n+1
FF
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
m
m+1
FF
0
1
p
Write to PWREG4
PWREG6
? Shift Shift m
Match detect
n
m
p Shift p
Match detect Match detect
Figure 10-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
Page 120
n One cycle period m
Shift
Shift registar
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F6
PWM6 pin
n
p
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86FS23UG
TMP86FS23UG
10.3.5 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, an INTTC6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the upper byte and lower byte in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 10-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD (TC5CR), 13H :Sets the operating cock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). : Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer. (EIRH). 5 : Enables INTTC6 interrupt. (TTREG5), 927CH : Sets the timer register (300 ms/27/fc = 927CH).
LD LD
(TC6CR), 04H (TC6CR), 0CH
TC6CR
Internal source clock Counter
TTREG5 (Lower byte) TTREG6 (Upper byte)
0
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
0
?
n
?
m
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 10-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 121
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
10.3.6 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the TC5 pin. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit event counter. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, an INTTC6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC5 pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fs/24 in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Program the lower byte (TTREG5), and upper byte (TTREG6) in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
10.3.7 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWM6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6 logic level.) Since PWREG6 and 5 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to PWREG6 and 5 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG6 and 5 during a run of the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG6 and 5. While the timer is stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG6 and 5. Set the lower byte (PWREG5) and upper byte (PWREG5) in this order to program PWREG6 and 5. (Programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) If executing the read instruction to PWREG6 and 5 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in PWREG6 and 5. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG6 and 5, reading data of PWREG6 and 5 is previous value until INTTC6 is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG6 and 5 immediately after the INTTC6 interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC6 interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR after the timer is stopped. Do not program TC6CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing thePWM6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
Page 122
TMP86FS23UG
CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TC6CR).7 : Sets the PWM6 pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM6 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 10-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms 2 s fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - - 2s - -
8.2 ms 4.1 ms
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LD (PWREG5), 07D0H (TC5CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal generation mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC6CR), 056H (TC6CR), 05EH
Page 123
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Internal source clock an
Write to PWREG5
Counter
0
1
an+1
FFFF
0
1
an
an+1
FFFF
0
1
bm bm+1
Write to PWREG5
FFFF
0
1
cp
PWREG5 (Lower byte)
?
Write to PWREG6
n
m
p
Write to PWREG6
Figure 10-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 124
b Shift Shift bm
Match detect an One cycle period bm
PWREG6 (Upper byte)
?
a
c Shift cp
Match detect Match detect
Shift
16-bit shift register
?
an
Match detect
Timer F/F6
PWM6 pin
an
cp
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86FS23UG
TMP86FS23UG
10.3.8 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1 or IDLE1 mode, and fc/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PPG6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6.) Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG5 TTREG6, PWREG5 PWREG6) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LDW LD (PWREG5), 07D0H (TTREG5), 8002H (TC5CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the cycle period. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PPG mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC6CR), 057H (TC6CR), 05FH
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi. Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR after the timer is stopped. Do not change TC6CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PPG6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer CLR (TC6CR).7: Sets the PPG6 pin to the high level Note 3: i = 5, 6
Page 125
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Write of "0"
Internal source clock 1 mn mn+1 qr-1 qr 0 1 mn mn+1 1 qr-1 qr 0 mn mn+1 0
Counter
0
PWREG5 (Lower byte)
?
n
Figure 10-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC60)
Page 126
Match detect Match detect Match detect mn mn
PWREG6 (Upper byte)
?
m
Match detect
Match detect
TTREG5 (Lower byte)
?
r
TTREG6 (Upper byte)
?
q F/F clear Held at the level when the timer stops
mn
Timer F/F6
PPG6 pin
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86FS23UG
TMP86FS23UG
10.3.9 Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit TimerCouter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG6 and 5 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. Note 3: i = 5, 6
10.3.9.1 Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG6, 5) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC6 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2 to 1 to switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock. Table 10-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Maximum Time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = 0100H) 7.81 ms Maximum Time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = FF00H) 1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC6 and 5, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC6: CLR SET (TC6CR).3 : (TC6CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops TC6 and 5. : SYSCR2 1 (Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.) (EIRH). 5 (SYSCR2).6 (TC5CR), 43H (TC6CR), 05H (TTREG5), 8000H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF5=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF6=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 : Enables the INTTC6. : IMF 1 : Starts TC6 and 5.
CLR RETI : VINTTC6: DW
(SYSCR2).7
: PINTTC6 : INTTC6 vector table
Page 127
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
10.3.9.2 High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG6, 5) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC6 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock. Table 10-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time (TTREG6, 5 = 0100H) 16 s Maximum time (TTREG6, 5 = FF00H) 4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC6 and 5, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET LD LD LD (SYSCR2).7 (TC5CR), 63H (TC6CR), 05H (TTREG5), 0F800H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF5=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF6=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 (EIRH). 5 : Enables the INTTC6. : IMF 1 (TC6CR).3 : (TC6CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops the TC6 and 5. : SYSCR2 0 (Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the low-frequency clock.) : Starts the TC6 and 5.
DI SET EI SET : PINTTC6: CLR CLR
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
RETI : VINTTC6: DW : PINTTC6 : INTTC6 vector table
Page 128
TMP86FS23UG
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.1 Configuration
UART control register 1
UARTCR1
Transmit data buffer
TDBUF
Receive data buffer
RDBUF
3
2
Receive control circuit
2
Transmit control circuit Shift register
Shift register
Parity bit Stop bit
Noise rejection circuit
RXD
INTTXD
INTRXD
TXD
Transmit/receive clock
Y M P X S 2 Y Counter
UARTSR
S fc/13 fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416
INTTC5
A B C
fc/2 fc/27 8 fc/2
6
fc/96
A B C D E F G H
4 2
UARTCR2
UART status register Baud rate generator
UART control register 2 MPX: Multiplexer
Figure 11-1 UART (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
Page 129
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.2 Control TMP86FS23UG
11.2 Control
UART is controlled by the UART Control Registers (UARTCR1, UARTCR2). The operating status can be monitored using the UART status register (UARTSR).
UART Control Register1
UARTCR1 (0025H) 7 TXE 6 RXE 5 STBT 4 EVEN 3 PE 2 1 BRG 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TXE RXE STBT EVEN PE
Transfer operation Receive operation Transmit stop bit length Even-numbered parity Parity addition
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Disable Enable Disable Enable 1 bit 2 bits Odd-numbered parity Even-numbered parity No parity Parity fc/13 [Hz] fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 TC5 ( Input INTTC5) fc/96 Write only
BRG
Transmit clock select
Note 1: When operations are disabled by setting TXE and RXE bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data transmit or receive complete. When the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buffer, the data are not transmitted. Even if data transmit is enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted. Note 2: The transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive. Note 3: UARTCR1 and UARTCR1 should be set to "0" before UARTCR1 is changed.
UART Control Register2
UARTCR2 (0026H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 RXDNC 1 0 STOPBR (Initial value: **** *000)
RXDNC
Selection of RXD input noise rejectio time
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
No noise rejection (Hysteresis input) Rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise 1 bit 2 bits
Write only
STOPBR
Receive stop bit length
Note: When UARTCR2 = "01", pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when UARTCR2 = "10", longer than 192/fc [s]; and when UARTCR2 = "11", longer than 384/fc [s].
Page 130
TMP86FS23UG
UART Status Register
UARTSR (0025H) 7 PERR 6 FERR 5 OERR 4 RBFL 3 TEND 2 TBEP 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 11**)
PERR FERR OERR RBFL TEND TBEP
Parity error flag Framing error flag Overrun error flag Receive data buffer full flag Transmit end flag Transmit data buffer empty flag
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
No parity error Parity error No framing error Framing error No overrun error Overrun error Receive data buffer empty Receive data buffer full On transmitting Transmit end Transmit data buffer full (Transmit data writing is finished) Transmit data buffer empty
Read only
Note: When an INTTXD is generated, TBEP flag is set to "1" automatically.
UART Receive Data Buffer
RDBUF (0F9BH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART Transmit Data Buffer
TDBUF (0F9BH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 131
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.3 Transfer Data Format TMP86FS23UG
11.3 Transfer Data Format
In UART, an one-bit start bit (Low level), stop bit (Bit length selectable at high level, by UARTCR1), and parity (Select parity in UARTCR1; even- or odd-numbered parity by UARTCR1) are added to the transfer data. The transfer data formats are shown as follows.
PE
STBT
1
Start
2
Bit 0
3
Bit 1
Frame Length 8
Bit 6
9
Bit 7
10
Stop 1
11
12
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Stop 2
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Stop 2
Figure 11-2 Transfer Data Format
Without parity / 1 STOP bit
With parity / 1 STOP bit
Without parity / 2 STOP bit
With parity / 2 STOP bit
Figure 11-3 Caution on Changing Transfer Data Format
Note: In order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above Figure 11-3 sequence except for the initial setting.
Page 132
TMP86FS23UG
11.4 Transfer Rate
The baud rate of UART is set of UARTCR1. The example of the baud rate are shown as follows. Table 11-1 Transfer Rate (Example)
Source Clock BRG 16 MHz 000 001 010 011 100 101 76800 [baud] 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 8 MHz 38400 [baud] 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 4 MHz 19200 [baud] 9600 4800 2400 1200 600
When TC5 is used as the UART transfer rate (when UARTCR1 = "110"), the transfer clock and transfer rate are determined as follows: Transfer clock [Hz] = TC5 source clock [Hz] / TTREG5 setting value Transfer Rate [baud] = Transfer clock [Hz] / 16
11.5 Data Sampling Method
The UART receiver keeps sampling input using the clock selected by UARTCR1 until a start bit is detected in RXD pin input. RT clock starts detecting "L" level of the RXD pin. Once a start bit is detected, the start bit, data bits, stop bit(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of RT7, RT8, and RT9 during one receiver clock interval (RT clock). (RT0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) Bit is determined according to majority rule (The data are the same twice or more out of three samplings).
RXD pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (a) Without noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
RXD pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (b) With noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
Figure 11-4 Data Sampling Method
Page 133
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.6 STOP Bit Length TMP86FS23UG
11.6 STOP Bit Length
Select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by UARTCR1.
11.7 Parity
Set parity / no parity by UARTCR1 and set parity type (Odd- or Even-numbered) by UARTCR1.
11.8 Transmit/Receive Operation
11.8.1 Data Transmit Operation
Set UARTCR1 to "1". Read UARTSR to check UARTSR = "1", then write data in TDBUF (Transmit data buffer). Writing data in TDBUF zero-clears UARTSR, transfers the data to the transmit shift register and the data are sequentially output from the TXD pin. The data output include a one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in UARTCR1 and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. Select the data transfer baud rate using UARTCR1. When data transmit starts, transmit buffer empty flag UARTSR is set to "1" and an INTTXD interrupt is generated. While UARTCR1 = "0" and from when "1" is written to UARTCR1 to when send data are written to TDBUF, the TXD pin is fixed at high level. When transmitting data, first read UARTSR, then write data in TDBUF. Otherwise, UARTSR is not zero-cleared and transmit does not start.
11.8.2 Data Receive Operation
Set UARTCR1 to "1". When data are received via the RXD pin, the receive data are transferred to RDBUF (Receive data buffer). At this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. When stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to RDBUF (Receive data buffer). Then the receive buffer full flag UARTSR is set and an INTRXD interrupt is generated. Select the data transfer baud rate using UARTCR1. If an overrun error (OERR) occurs when data are received, the data are not transferred to RDBUF (Receive data buffer) but discarded; data in the RDBUF are not affected.
Note:When a receive operation is disabled by setting UARTCR1 bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data receive is completed. However, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting may not become valid. If a framing error occurs, be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
Page 134
TMP86FS23UG
11.9 Status Flag
11.9.1 Parity Error
When parity determined using the receive data bits differs from the received parity bit, the parity error flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Parity
Stop
Shift register
UARTSR
xxxx0**
pxxxx0*
1pxxxx0
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears PERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 11-5 Generation of Parity Error 11.9.2 Framing Error
When "0" is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
UARTSR
xxx0**
xxxx0*
0xxxx0
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears FERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 11-6 Generation of Framing Error 11.9.3 Overrun Error
When all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in RDBUF, overrun error flag UARTSR is set to "1". In this case, the receive data is discarded; data in RDBUF are not affected. The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
Page 135
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.9 Status Flag TMP86FS23UG
UARTSR
RXD pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RDBUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
UARTSR
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears OERR.
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 11-7 Generation of Overrun Error
Note:Receive operations are disabled until the overrun error flag UARTSR is cleared.
11.9.4 Receive Data Buffer Full
Loading the received data in RDBUF sets receive data buffer full flag UARTSR to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the RDBUF is read after reading the UARTSR.
RXD pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RDBUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
xxxx
After reading UARTSR then RDBUF clears RBFL.
UARTSR
INTRXD interrupt
Figure 11-8 Generation of Receive Data Buffer Full
Note:If the overrun error flag UARTSR is set during the period between reading the UARTSR and reading the RDBUF, it cannot be cleared by only reading the RDBUF. Therefore, after reading the RDBUF, read the UARTSR again to check whether or not the overrun error flag which should have been cleared still remains set.
11.9.5 Transmit Data Buffer Empty
When no data is in the transmit buffer TDBUF, UARTSR is set to "1", that is, when data in TDBUF are transferred to the transmit shift register and data transmit starts, transmit data buffer empty flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the TDBUF is written after reading the UARTSR.
Page 136
TMP86FS23UG
Data write
TDBUF
Data write
xxxx
yyyy
zzzz
Shift register
TXD pin
*****1
1xxxx0
*1xxxx Bit 0
****1x Final bit
*****1 Stop
1yyyy0
Start
UARTSR After reading UARTSR writing TDBUF clears TBEP.
INTTXD interrupt
Figure 11-9 Generation of Transmit Data Buffer Empty 11.9.6 Transmit End Flag
When data are transmitted and no data is in TDBUF (UARTSR = "1"), transmit end flag UARTSR is set to "1". The UARTSR is cleared to "0" when the data transmit is stated after writing the TDBUF.
Shift register
TXD pin
***1xx
****1x
*****1
1yyyy0
*1yyyy
Stop
Data write for TDBUF
Start
Bit 0
UARTSR
UARTSR
INTTXD interrupt
Figure 11-10 Generation of Transmit End Flag and Transmit Data Buffer Empty
Page 137
11. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART )
11.9 Status Flag TMP86FS23UG
Page 138
TMP86FS23UG
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
The TMP86FS23UG has a clocked-synchronous 8-bit serial interface. Serial interface has an 8-byte transmit and receive data buffer that can automatically and continuously transfer up to 64 bits of data. Serial interface is connected to outside peripherl devices via SO, SI, SCK port.
12.1 Configuration
SIO control / status register
SIOSR
SIOCR1
SIOCR2
CPU
Control circuit
Buffer control circuit Shift register Shift clock
Transmit and receive data buffer (8 bytes in DBR)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Serial data output 8-bit transfer 4-bit transfer
SI
Serial data input
INTSIO interrupt request
Serial clock
SCK
Serial clock I/O
Figure 12-1 Serial Interface
Page 139
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.2 Control TMP86FS23UG
12.2 Control
The serial interface is controlled by SIO control registers (SIOCR1/SIOCR2). The serial interface status can be determined by reading SIO status register (SIOSR). The transmit and receive data buffer is controlled by the SIOCR2. The data buffer is assigned to address 0F90H to 0F97H for SIO in the DBR area, and can continuously transfer up to 8 words (bytes or nibbles) at one time. When the specified number of words has been transferred, a buffer empty (in the transmit mode) or a buffer full (in the receive mode or transmit/receive mode) interrupt (INTSIO) is generated. When the internal clock is used as the serial clock in the 8-bit receive mode and the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, a fixed interval wait can be applied to the serial clock for each word transferred. Four different wait times can be selected with SIOCR2. SIO Control Register 1
SIOCR1 (0F98H) 7 SIOS 6 SIOINH 5 4 SIOM 3 2 1 SCK 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
SIOS
Indicate transfer start / stop
0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 010:
Stop Start Continuously transfer Abort transfer (Automatically cleared after abort) 8-bit transmit mode 4-bit transmit mode 8-bit transmit / receive mode 8-bit receive mode 4-bit receive mode Write only
SIOINH
Continue / abort transfer
SIOM
Transfer mode select
100: 101: 110:
Except the above: Reserved NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 SCK Serial clock select 010 011 100 101 110 111 fc/213 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 Reserved External clock ( Input from SCK pin ) SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/25 Write only
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Set SIOS to "0" and SIOINH to "1" when setting the transfer mode or serial clock. Note 3: SIOCR1 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc.
SIO Control Register 2
SIOCR2 (0F99H) 7 6 5 4 WAIT 3 2 1 BUF 0 (Initial value: ***0 0000)
Page 140
TMP86FS23UG
Always sets "00" except 8-bit transmit / receive mode. 00: WAIT Wait control 01: 10: 11: 000: 001: 010: BUF Number of transfer words (Buffer address in use) 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: Tf = TD(Non wait) Tf = 2TD(Wait) Tf = 4TD(Wait) Tf = 8TD (Wait) 1 word transfer 2 words transfer 3 words transfer 4 words transfer 5 words transfer 6 words transfer 7 words transfer 8 words transfer 0F90H 0F90H ~ 0F91H 0F90H ~ 0F92H 0F90H ~ 0F93H 0F90H ~ 0F94H 0F90H ~ 0F95H 0F90H ~ 0F96H 0F90H ~ 0F97H Write only
Note 1: The lower 4 bits of each buffer are used during 4-bit transfers. Zeros (0) are stored to the upper 4bits when receiving. Note 2: Transmitting starts at the lowest address. Received data are also stored starting from the lowest address to the highest address. ( The first buffer address transmitted is 0F90H ). Note 3: The value to be loaded to BUF is held after transfer is completed. Note 4: SIOCR2 must be set when the serial interface is stopped (SIOF = 0). Note 5: *: Don't care Note 6: SIOCR2 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc.
SIO Status Register
SIOSR (0F99H) 7 SIOF 6 SEF 5 4 3 2 1 0
SIOF SEF
Serial transfer operating status monitor Shift operating status monitor
0: 1: 0: 1:
Transfer terminated Transfer in process Shift operation terminated Shift operation in process
Read only
Note 1: Tf; Frame time, TD; Data transfer time Note 2: After SIOS is cleared to "0", SIOF is cleared to "0" at the termination of transfer or the setting of SIOINH to "1".
(output)
SCK output
TD Tf
Figure 12-2 Frame time (Tf) and Data transfer time (TD)
12.3 Serial clock
12.3.1 Clock source
Internal clock or external clock for the source clock is selected by SIOCR1.
Page 141
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.3 Serial clock TMP86FS23UG
12.3.1.1 Internal clock
Any of six frequencies can be selected. The serial clock is output to the outside on the SCK pin. The SCK pin goes high when transfer starts. When data writing (in the transmit mode) or reading (in the receive mode or the transmit/receive mode) cannot keep up with the serial clock rate, there is a wait function that automatically stops the serial clock and holds the next shift operation until the read/write processing is completed. Table 12-1 Serial Clock Rate
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 SCK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Clock fc/213 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 External Baud Rate 1.91 Kbps 61.04 Kbps 122.07 Kbps 244.14 Kbps 488.28 Kbps 976.56 Kbps External Clock fs/25 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 External DV7CK = 1 Baud Rate 1024 bps 61.04 Kbps 122.07 Kbps 244.14 Kbps 488.28 Kbps 976.56 Kbps External SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode Clock fs/25 External Baud Rate 1024 bps External
Note: 1 Kbit = 1024 bit (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Automatically wait function
SCK
pin (output)
SO
pin (output) Written transmit data a
a0
a1
a2
a3 b
b0
b1 c
b2
b3
c0
c1
Figure 12-3 Automatic Wait Function (at 4-bit transmit mode)
12.3.1.2 External clock
An external clock connected to the SCK pin is used as the serial clock. In this case, output latch of this port should be set to "1". To ensure shifting, a pulse width of at least 4 machine cycles is required. This pulse is needed for the shift operation to execute certainly. Actually, there is necessary processing time for interrupting, writing, and reading. The minimum pulse is determined by setting the mode and the program. Therfore, maximum transfer frequency will be 488.3K bit/sec (at fc=16MHz).
SCK
pin (Output)
tSCKL tSCKH
tcyc = 4/fc (In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) 4/fs (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes) tSCKL, tSCKH > 4tcyc
Figure 12-4 External clock pulse width
Page 142
TMP86FS23UG
12.3.2 Shift edge
The leading edge is used to transmit, and the trailing edge is used to receive.
12.3.2.1 Leading edge
Transmitted data are shifted on the leading edge of the serial clock (falling edge of the SCK pin input/ output).
12.3.2.2 Trailing edge
Received data are shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the SCK pin input/output).
SCK pin
SO pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
3210
*321
**32
***3
(a) Leading edge
SCK pin
SI pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
****
0***
10**
210*
3210
*; Don't care
(b) Trailing edge
Figure 12-5 Shift edge
12.4 Number of bits to transfer
Either 4-bit or 8-bit serial transfer can be selected. When 4-bit serial transfer is selected, only the lower 4 bits of the transmit/receive data buffer register are used. The upper 4 bits are cleared to "0" when receiving. The data is transferred in sequence starting at the least significant bit (LSB).
12.5 Number of words to transfer
Up to 8 words consisting of 4 bits of data (4-bit serial transfer) or 8 bits (8-bit serial transfer) of data can be transferred continuously. The number of words to be transferred can be selected by SIOCR2. An INTSIO interrupt is generated when the specified number of words has been transferred. If the number of words is to be changed during transfer, the serial interface must be stopped before making the change. The number of words can be changed during automatic-wait operation of an internal clock. In this case, the serial interface is not required to be stopped.
Page 143
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.6 Transfer Mode TMP86FS23UG
SCK pin
SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
INTSIO interrupt
(a) 1 word transmit
SCK pin
SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO interrupt
(b) 3 words transmit
SCK pin
SI pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO interrupt
(c) 3 words receive
Figure 12-6 Number of words to transfer (Example: 1word = 4bit)
12.6 Transfer Mode
SIOCR1 is used to select the transmit, receive, or transmit/receive mode.
12.6.1 4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes
In these modes, firstly set the SIO control register to the transmit mode, and then write first transmit data (number of transfer words to be transferred) to the data buffer registers (DBR). After the data are written, the transmission is started by setting SIOCR1 to "1". The data are then output sequentially to the SO pin in synchronous with the serial clock, starting with the least significant bit (LSB). As soon as the LSB has been output, the data are transferred from the data buffer register to the shift register. When the final data bit has been transferred and the data buffer register is empty, an INTSIO (Buffer empty) interrupt is generated to request the next transmitted data. When the internal clock is used, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated if the next transmitted data are not loaded to the data buffer register by the time the number of data words specified with the SIOCR2 has been transmitted. Writing even one word of data cancels the automatic-wait; therefore, when transmitting two or more words, always write the next word before transmission of the previous word is completed.
Note:Automatic waits are also canceled by writing to a DBR not being used as a transmit data buffer register; therefore, during SIO do not use such DBR for other applications. For example, when 3 words are transmitted, do not use the DBR of the remained 5 words.
When an external clock is used, the data must be written to the data buffer register before shifting next data. Thus, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay time from the generation of the interrupt request to writing of the data to the data buffer register by the interrupt service program. The transmission is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in buffer empty interrupt service program. Page 144
TMP86FS23UG
SIOCR1 is cleared, the operation will end after all bits of words are transmitted. That the transmission has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR because SIOSR is cleared to "0" when a transfer is completed. When SIOCR1 is set, the transmission is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". When an external clock is used, it is also necessary to clear SIOCR1 to "0" before shifting the next data; If SIOCR1 is not cleared before shift out, dummy data will be transmitted and the operation will end. If it is necessary to change the number of words, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0".
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Output) SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 12-7 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Input) SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 12-8 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, External clock)
Page 145
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.6 Transfer Mode TMP86FS23UG
SCK pin
SIOSR
SO pin
MSB of last word
tSODH = min 3.5/fc [s] ( In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) tSODH = min 3.5/fs [s] (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes)
Figure 12-9 Transmiiied Data Hold Time at End of Transfer 12.6.2 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes
After setting the control registers to the receive mode, set SIOCR1 to "1" to enable receiving. The data are then transferred to the shift register via the SI pin in synchronous with the serial clock. When one word of data has been received, it is transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register (DBR). When the number of words specified with the SIOCR2 has been received, an INTSIO (Buffer full) interrupt is generated to request that these data be read out. The data are then read from the data buffer registers by the interrupt service program. When the internal clock is used, and the previous data are not read from the data buffer register before the next data are received, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated until the data are read. A wait will not be initiated if even one data word has been read.
Note:Waits are also canceled by reading a DBR not being used as a received data buffer register is read; therefore, during SIO do not use such DBR for other applications.
When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, the previous data are read before the next data are transferred to the data buffer register. If the previous data have not been read, the next data will not be transferred to the data buffer register and the receiving of any more data will be canceled. When an external clock is used, the maximum transfer speed is determined by the delay between the time when the interrupt request is generated and when the data received have been read. The receiving is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in buffer full interrupt service program. When SIOCR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIOCR1 cleared, the receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been received. That the receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR. SIOSR is cleared to "0" when the receiving is ended. After confirmed the receiving termination, the final receiving data is read. When SIOCR1 is set, the receiving is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". (The received data is ignored, and it is not required to be read out.) If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0" then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of data receiving, SIOCR2 must be rewritten before the received data is read out.
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIOCR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Page 146
TMP86FS23UG
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Output) SI pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO Interrupt
DBR
a
Read out
b
Read out
Figure 12-10 Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock) 12.6.3 8-bit transfer / receive mode
After setting the SIO control register to the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, write the data to be transmitted first to the data buffer registers (DBR). After that, enable the transmit/receive by setting SIOCR1 to "1". When transmitting, the data are output from the SO pin at leading edges of the serial clock. When receiving, the data are input to the SI pin at the trailing edges of the serial clock. When the all receive is enabled, 8-bit data are transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register. An INTSIO interrupt is generated when the number of data words specified with the SIOCR2 has been transferred. Usually, read the receive data from the buffer register in the interrupt service. The data buffer register is used for both transmitting and receiving; therefore, always write the data to be transmitted after reading the all received data. When the internal clock is used, a wait is initiated until the received data are read and the next transfer data are written. A wait will not be initiated if even one transfer data word has been written. When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, it is necessary to read the received data and write the data to be transmitted next before starting the next shift operation. When an external clock is used, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay between generation of an interrupt request and the received data are read and the data to be transmitted next are written. The transmit/receive operation is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in INTSIO interrupt service program. When SIOCR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIOCR1 cleared, the transmitting/receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been transmitted. That the transmitting/receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR. SIOSR is cleared to "0" when the transmitting/receiving is ended. When SIOCR1 is set, the transmit/receive operation is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of transmit/receive operation, SIOCR2 must be rewritten before reading and writing of the receive/transmit data.
Page 147
12. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
12.6 Transfer Mode TMP86FS23UG
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIOCR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (output) SO pin
a0 c0
a1 c1
a2 c2
a3 c3
a4 c4
a5 c5
a6 c6
a7 c7
b0 d0
b1 d1
b2 d2
b3 d3
b4 d4
b5 d5
b6 d6
b7 d7
SI pin
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write (a) Read out (c)
c
b
Write (b)
d
Read out (d)
Figure 12-11 Transfer / Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
SCK pin
SIOSR
SO pin
Bit 6
Bit 7 of last word
tSODH = min 4/fc [s] ( In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) tSODH = min 4/fs [s] (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes)
Figure 12-12 Transmitted Data Hold Time at End of Transfer / Receive
Page 148
TMP86FS23UG
13. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
The TMP86FS23UG have a 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter.
13.1 Configuration
The circuit configuration of the 10-bit AD converter is shown in Figure 13-1. It consists of control register ADCCR1 and ADCCR2, converted value register ADCDR1 and ADCDR2, a DA converter, a sample-hold circuit, a comparator, and a successive comparison circuit.
DA converter
VAREF VSS
R/2
AVDD
R Reference voltage
R/2
Analog input multiplexer
AIN0
Sample hold circuit
A
Y 10 Analog comparator
AIN7
n S EN IREFON 4 SAIN ADRS AINDS
Successive approximate circuit Shift clock Control circuit 2 AMD 3 ACK ADCCR2 8 ADCDR1 2 INTADC
EOCF ADBF
ADCCR1
ADCDR2
AD converter control register 1, 2
AD conversion result register 1, 2
Note: Before using AD converter, set appropriate value to I/O port register conbining a analog input port. For details, see the section on "I/O ports".
Figure 13-1 10-bit AD Converter
Page 149
13. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
13.2 Register configuration TMP86FS23UG
13.2 Register configuration
The AD converter consists of the following four registers: 1. AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) This register selects the analog channels and operation mode (Software start or repeat) in which to perform AD conversion and controls the AD converter as it starts operating. 2. AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2) This register selects the AD conversion time and controls the connection of the DA converter (Ladder resistor network). 3. AD converted value register 1 (ADCDR1) This register used to store the digital value fter being converted by the AD converter. 4. AD converted value register 2 (ADCDR2) This register monitors the operating status of the AD converter. AD Converter Control Register 1
ADCCR1 (000EH) 7 ADRS 6 AMD 5 4 AINDS 3 2 SAIN 1 0 (Initial value: 0001 0000)
ADRS
AD conversion start
0: 1: 00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1: 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111:
AD conversion start AD operation disable Software start mode Reserved Repeat mode Analog input enable Analog input disable AIN0 AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 AIN4 AIN5 AIN6 AIN7 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
AMD
AD operating mode
AINDS
Analog input control
R/W
SAIN
Analog input channel select
Note 1: Select analog input channel during AD converter stops (ADCDR2 = "0"). Note 2: When the analog input channel is all use disabling, the ADCCR1 should be set to "1". Note 3: During conversion, Do not perform port output instruction to maintain a precision for all of the pins because analog input port use as general input port. And for port near to analog input, Do not input intense signaling of change. Note 4: The ADCCR1 is automatically cleared to "0" after starting conversion. Note 5: Do not set ADCCR1 newly again during AD conversion. Before setting ADCCR1 newly again, check ADCDR2 to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine). Note 6: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register1 (ADCCR1) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR1 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or NORMAL2 mode.
Page 150
TMP86FS23UG
AD Converter Control Register 2
ADCCR2 (000FH) 7 6 5 IREFON 4 "1" 3 2 ACK 1 0 "0" (Initial value: **0* 000*)
IREFON
DA converter (Ladder resistor) connection control
0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Connected only during AD conversion Always connected 39/fc Reserved 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc Reserved
ACK
AD conversion time select (Refer to the following table about the conversion time)
R/W
Note 1: Always set bit0 in ADCCR2 to "0" and set bit4 in ADCCR2 to "1". Note 2: When a read instruction for ADCCR2, bit6 to 7 in ADCCR2 read in as undefined data. Note 3: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register2 (ADCCR2) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR2 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or NORMAL2 mode.
Table 13-1 ACK setting and Conversion time
Condition ACK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s Conversion time 39/fc 16 MHz 8 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 19.5 s Reserved 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s Reserved 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 10 MHz 5 MHz 2.5 MHz 15.6 s
Note 1: Setting for "-" in the above table are inhibited.
fc: High Frequency oscillation clock [Hz]
Note 2: Set conversion time setting should be kept more than the following time by Analog reference voltage (VAREF) .
VAREF = 4.5 to 5.5 V VAREF = 2.7 to 5.5 V 15.6 s and more 31.2 s and more
AD Converted value Register 1
ADCDR1 (0021H) 7 AD09 6 AD08 5 AD07 4 AD06 3 AD05 2 AD04 1 AD03 0 AD02 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
AD Converted value Register 2
ADCDR2 (0020H) 7 AD01 6 AD00 5 EOCF 4 ADBF 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 ****)
Page 151
13. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
13.2 Register configuration TMP86FS23UG
EOCF ADBF
AD conversion end flag AD conversion BUSY flag
0: 1: 0: 1:
Before or during conversion Conversion completed During stop of AD conversion During AD conversion
Read only
Note 1: The ADCDR2 is cleared to "0" when reading the ADCDR1. Therfore, the AD conversion result should be read to ADCDR2 more first than ADCDR1. Note 2: The ADCDR2 is set to "1" when AD conversion starts, and cleared to "0" when AD conversion finished. It also is cleared upon entering STOP mode or SLOW mode . Note 3: If a read instruction is executed for ADCDR2, read data of bit3 to bit0 are unstable.
Page 152
TMP86FS23UG
13.3 Function
13.3.1 Software Start Mode
After setting ADCCR1 to "01" (software start mode), set ADCCR1 to "1". AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCR1 is thereby started. After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers (ADCDR1, ADCDR2) and at the same time ADCDR2 is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated. ADRS is automatically cleared after AD conversion has started. Do not set ADCCR1 newly again (Restart) during AD conversion. Before setting ADRS newly again, check ADCDR2 to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine).
AD conversion start ADCCR1 AD conversion start
ADCDR2
ADCDR1 status
Indeterminate
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result EOCF cleared by reading conversion result
ADCDR2
INTADC interrupt request ADCDR1 Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read
ADCDR2
Figure 13-2 Software Start Mode 13.3.2 Repeat Mode
AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCR1 is performed repeatedly. In this mode, AD conversion is started by setting ADCCR1 to "1" after setting ADCCR1 to "11" (Repeat mode). After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers (ADCDR1, ADCDR2) and at the same time ADCDR2 is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated. In repeat mode, each time one AD conversion is completed, the next AD conversion is started. To stop AD conversion, set ADCCR1 to "00" (Disable mode) by writing 0s. The AD convert operation is stopped immediately. The converted value at this time is not stored in the AD converted value register.
Page 153
13. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
13.3 Function TMP86FS23UG
ADCCR1 AD conversion start ADCCR1
"11"
"00"
Conversion operation
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
3rd conversion result
AD convert operation suspended. Conversion result is not stored.
3rd conversion result
ADCDR1,ADCDR2
Indeterminate
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
ADCDR2 EOCF cleared by reading conversion result
INTADC interrupt request ADCDR1 ADCDR2 Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read
Conversion result read Conversion result read
Figure 13-3 Repeat Mode 13.3.3 Register Setting
1. Set up the AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) as follows: * Choose the channel to AD convert using AD input channel select (SAIN). * Specify analog input enable for analog input control (AINDS). * Specify AMD for the AD converter control operation mode (software or repeat mode). 2. Set up the AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2) as follows: * Set the AD conversion time using AD conversion time (ACK). For details on how to set the conversion time, refer to Figure 13-1 and AD converter control register 2. * Choose IREFON for DA converter control. 3. After setting up (1) and (2) above, set AD conversion start (ADRS) of AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) to "1". If software start mode has been selected, AD conversion starts immediately. 4. After an elapse of the specified AD conversion time, the AD converted value is stored in AD converted value register 1 (ADCDR1) and the AD conversion finished flag (EOCF) of AD converted value register 2 (ADCDR2) is set to "1", upon which time AD conversion interrupt INTADC is generated. 5. EOCF is cleared to "0" by a read of the conversion result. However, if reconverted before a register read, although EOCF is cleared the previous conversion result is retained until the next conversion is completed.
Page 154
TMP86FS23UG
Example :After selecting the conversion time 19.5 s at 16 MHz and the analog input channel AIN3 pin, perform AD conversion once. After checking EOCF, read the converted value, store the lower 2 bits in address 0009EH nd store the upper 8 bits in address 0009FH in RAM. The operation mode is software start mode.
: (port setting) : LD LD : : (ADCCR1) , 00100011B (ADCCR2) , 11011000B ;Set port register approrriately before setting AD converter registers. (Refer to section I/O port in details) ; Select AIN3 ;Select conversion time(312/fc) and operation mode
SET SLOOP : TEST JRS
(ADCCR1) . 7 (ADCDR2) . 5 T, SLOOP
; ADRS = 1(AD conversion start) ; EOCF= 1 ?
LD LD LD LD
A , (ADCDR2) (9EH) , A A , (ADCDR1) (9FH), A
; Read result data
; Read result data
13.4 STOP/SLOW Modes during AD Conversion
When standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode) is entered forcibly during AD conversion, the AD convert operation is suspended and the AD converter is initialized (ADCCR1 and ADCCR2 are initialized to initial value). Also, the conversion result is indeterminate. (Conversion results up to the previous operation are cleared, so be sure to read the conversion results before entering standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode).) When restored from standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode), AD conversion is not automatically restarted, so it is necessary to restart AD conversion. Note that since the analog reference voltage is automatically disconnected, there is no possibility of current flowing into the analog reference voltage.
Page 155
13. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
13.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result TMP86FS23UG
13.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result
The analog input voltage is corresponded to the 10-bit digital value converted by the AD as shown in Figure 13-4.
3FFH 3FEH 3FDH AD conversion result 03H 02H 01H
VAREF VSS
0
1
2
3 1021 1022 1023 1024 Analog input voltage
1024
Figure 13-4 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result (Typ.)
Page 156
TMP86FS23UG
13.6 Precautions about AD Converter
13.6.1 Restrictions for AD Conversion interrupt (INTADC) usage
When an AD interrupt is used, it may not be processed depending on program composition. For example, if an INTADC interrupt request is generated while an interrupt with priority lower than the interrupt latch IL15 (INTADC) is being accepted, the INTADC interrupt latch may be cleared without the INTADC interrupt being processed. The completion of AD conversion can be detected by the following methods: (1) Method not using the AD conversion end interrupt Whether or not AD conversion is completed can be detected by monitoring the AD conversion end flag (EOCF) by software. This can be done by polling EOCF or monitoring EOCF at regular intervals after start of AD conversion. (2) Method for detecting AD conversion end while a lower-priority interrupt is being processed While an interrupt with priority lower than INTADC is being processed, check the AD conversion end flag (EOCF) and interrupt latch IL15. If IL15 = 0 and EOCF = 1, call the AD conversion end interrupt processing routine with consideration given to PUSH/POP operations. At this time, if an interrupt request with priority higher than INTADC has been set, the AD conversion end interrupt processing routine will be executed first against the specified priority. If necessary, we recommend that the AD conversion end interrupt processing routine be called after checking whether or not an interrupt request with priority higher than INTADC has been set.
13.6.2 Analog input pin voltage range
Make sure the analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN7) are used at voltages within VAREF to VSS. If any voltage outside this range is applied to one of the analog input pins, the converted value on that pin becomes uncertain. The other analog input pins also are affected by that.
13.6.3 Analog input shared pins
The analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN7) are shared with input/output ports. When using any of the analog inputs to execute AD conversion, do not execute input/output instructions for all other ports. This is necessary to prevent the accuracy of AD conversion from degrading. Not only these analog input shared pins, some other pins may also be affected by noise arising from input/output to and from adjacent pins.
13.6.4 Noise Countermeasure
The internal equivalent circuit of the analog input pins is shown in Figure 13-5. The higher the output impedance of the analog input source, more easily they are susceptible to noise. Therefore, make sure the output impedance of the signal source in your design is 5 k or less. Toshiba also recommends attaching a capacitor external to the chip.
Internal resistance AINi Permissible signal source impedance
5 k (max) 5 k (typ)
Analog comparator
Internal capacitance
C = 12 pF (typ.)
DA converter
Note) i = 7 to 0
Figure 13-5
Analog Input Equivalent Circuit and Example of Input Pin Processing
Page 157
13. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
13.6 Precautions about AD Converter TMP86FS23UG
Page 158
TMP86FS23UG
14. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
In the TMP86FS23UG, the STOP mode is released by not only P20(INT5/STOP) pin but also four (STOP2 to STOP5) pins. When the STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, the STOP pin needs to be used. In details, refer to the following section " 14.2 Control ".
14.1 Configuration
INT5 STOP mode release signal (1: Release) STOP
STOP2 STOP3 STOP4 STOP5
STOPCR (0F9AH)
Figure 14-1 Key-on Wakeup Circuit
14.2 Control
STOP2 to STOP5 pins can controlled by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR). It can be configured as enable/disable in 1-bit unit. When those pins are used for STOP mode release, configure corresponding I/O pins to input mode by I/O port register beforehand. Key-on Wakeup Control Register
STOPCR (0F9AH) 7 STOP5 6 STOP4 5 STOP3 4 STOP2 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 ****)
STOP5 STOP4 STOP3 STOP2
0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable
STOP5 STOP4 STOP3 STOP2
STOP mode released by STOP5 STOP mode released by STOP4 STOP mode released by STOP3 STOP mode released by STOP2
Write only Write only Write only Write only
14.3 Function
Stop mode can be entered by setting up the System Control Register (SYSCR1), and can be exited by detecting the "L" level on STOP2 to STOP5 pins, which are enabled by STOPCR, for releasing STOP mode (Note1).
Page 159
14. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
14.3 Function TMP86FS23UG
Also, each level of the STOP2 to STOP5 pins can be confirmed by reading corresponding I/O port data register, check all STOP2 to STOP5 pins "H" that is enabled by STOPCR before the STOP mode is startd (Note2,3).
Note 1: When the STOP mode released by the edge release mode (SYSCR1 = "0"), inhibit input from STOP2 to STOP5 pins by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) or must be set "H" level into STOP2 to STOP5 pins that are available input during STOP mode. Note 2: When the STOP pin input is high or STOP2 to STOP5 pins inputwhich is enabled by STOPCR is low, executing an instruction which starts STOP mode will not place in STOP mode but instead will immediately start the release sequence (Warm up). Note 3: The input circuit of Key-on Wakeup input and Port input is separatedAAso each input voltage threshold value is diffrent. Therefore, a value comes from port input before STOP mode start may be diffrent from a value which is detected by Key-on Wakeup input (Figure 14-2). Note 4: STOP pin doesn't have the control register such as STOPCR, so when STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, STOP pin also should be used as STOP mode release function. Note 5: In STOP mode, Key-on Wakeup pin which is enabled as input mode (for releasing STOP mode) by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) may genarate the penetration current, so the said pin must be disabled AD conversion input (analog voltage input). Note 6: When the STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, the level of STOP pin should hold "L" level (Figure 14-3).
Port input Key-on wakeup input
External pin
Figure 14-2 Key-on Wakeup Input and Port Input
a) STOP
b) In case of STOP2 to STOP5
STOP pin STOP mode Release STOP mode
STOP pin "L"
STOP2 pin
STOP mode
Release STOP mode
Figure 14-3 Priority of STOP pin and STOP2 to STOP5 pins
Table 14-1 Release level (edge) of STOP mode
Release level (edge) Pin name SYSCR1="1" (Note2) "H" level "L" level "L" level "L" level "L" level SYSCR1="0" Rising edge Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1)
STOP
STOP2 STOP3 STOP4 STOP5
Page 160
TMP86FS23UG
15. LCD Driver
The TMP86FS23UG has a driver and control circuit to directly drive the liquid crystal device (LCD). The pins to be connected to LCD are as follows: 1. Segment output port 2. Common output port 32 pins 4 pins (SEG31 to SEG0) (COM3 to COM0)
In addition, VLC pin is provided for the LCD power supply. The devices that can be directly driven is selectable from LCD of the following drive methods: 1. 1/4 Duty (1/3 Bias) LCD 2. 1/3 Duty (1/3 Bias) LCD 3. 1/3 Duty (1/2 Bias) LCD 4. 1/2 Duty (1/2 Bias) LCD 5. Static LCD Max 128 Segments Max 96 Segments Max 96 Segments Max 64 Segments Max 32 Segments (8 segments x 16 digits) (8 segments x 12 digits) (8 segments x 12 digits) (8 segments x 8 digits) (8 segments x 4 digits)
15.1 Configuration
LCDCR 7 EDSP 6 5 LRSE 4 3 DUTY 2 1 0 SLF DBR fc/217, fs/29 fc/216, fs/28 fc/215 fc/214 display data area
Duty control
Timing control
Display data select control
Blanking control
Display data buffer register
Power Switch and Bias, Bleeder resistance
Common driver
Segment driver
VLC
COM0
to
COM3
SEG0
to
SEG31
Figure 15-1 LCD Driver
Page 161
15. LCD Driver
15.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
15.2 Control
The LCD control register (LCDCR) controls the LCD driver. EDSP specifies whether to enable the LCD display. If EDSP is cleared to "0" for blanking, the power switch for the VLC pin is turned off. So, the COM pin and pin output selected with SEG enter GND level. LCD Driver Control Register
LCDCR (0027H) 7 EDSP 6 LRSEL 5 4 3 DUTY 2 1 SLF 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
EDSP
LCD display control
0: Blanking 1: Enables LCD display (Blanking is released) NORMAL1/2, IDLE/1/2 mode SLF Setting SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode SLF Setting 01 28/fc 2 /fc
11
LRSE
Period selection of enabling (turn on) of the low bleeder resistor (for implementing appropriate LCD panel drive capability)
11 00: 01: 10: 11: 26/fc 2 /fc
9
10 27/fc 2 /fc
10
00 29/fc 2 /fc
12
01 1/fs 2 /fs
3
00 2/fs 24/fs
Always enabling Reserved R/W
DUTY
Selection of driving methods
000: 1/4 Duty (1/3 Bias) 001: 1/3 Duty (1/3 Bias) 010: 1/3 Duty (1/2 Bias) 011: 1/2 Duty (1/2 Bias) 100: Static 101: Reserved 110: Reserved 111: Reserved NORMAL1/2, IDLE0/1/2 mode SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/29 [Hz] fs/28 Reserved Reserved
SLF
Selection of LCD frame frequency
00: 01: 10: 11:
fc/217 fc/2
16
[Hz]
fc/215 fc/213
Note 1: The base-frequency (SLF) source clock is switched between high and low frequencies by the SYSCR2 programming. The base frequency does not depend on the TBTCR programming. Note 2: If the setting of SYSCR2is changed, be sure to turn off the LCD (clear EDSP to "0") to avoid the output of incorrect waveform. Note 3: Programming LRSE properly according to the LCD panel used. As the LRSE programming increases (lengthen the period of enabling of the low resistor), the drive capability becomes higher while the power dissipation increases. Reversely, as the LRSE programming decreases shorten the period of enabling of the low resistor, the drive capability becomes lower while the power consumption decreases. Note 4: If the IDLE0, SLEEP0, or STOP mode is activated when the display is enabled, LCDCR is automatically changed to "0" to blank the display.
Page 162
TMP86FS23UG
15.2.1 LCD driving methods
As for LCD driving method, 5 types can be selected by LCDCR. The driving method is initialized in the initial program according to the LCD used.
VLCD 1/fF VLCD 1/fF
0
0
-VLCD
Data "1" (a) 1/4 Duty (1/3 Bias)
Data "0"
-VLCD
Data "1"
Data "0"
(b) 1/3 Duty (1/3 Bias) VLCD
VLCD
1/fF
1/fF
0 -VLCD Data "1" 1/fF Data "0"
0 -VLCD Data "1" Data "0"
(c) 1/3 Duty (1/2 Bias) VLCD
(d) 1/2 Duty (1/2 Bias)
0
-VLCD
Data "1" (e) Static
Data "0"
Note 1: fF: Frame frequency Note 2: VLCD: LCD drive voltage (= VDD - VLC)
Figure 15-2 LCD Drive Waveform (COM - SEG pins)
Page 163
15. LCD Driver
15.1 Configuration TMP86FS23UG
15.2.2 Frame frequency
Frame frequency (fF) is set according to driving method and base frequency as shown in the following Table 15-1. The base frequency is selected by LCDCR according to the frequency fc and fs of the basic clock to be used. Table 15-1 Setting of LCD Frame Frequency for high frequency clock
(a) At the SYSCR2 = "0". Frame Frequency [Hz] SLF Base Frequency [Hz] 1/4 Duty 1/3 Duty 1/2 Duty Static
fc ------17 2
00 (fc = 16 MHz) (fc = 8 MHz)
fc ------17 2
122 61
4 fc -- * ------3 2 17
163 81
4 fc -- * ------2 2 17
244 122
fc ------17 2
122 61
fc ------16 2
01 (fc = 8 MHz) (fc = 4 MHz)
fc ------16 2
122 61
4 fc -- * ------3 2 16
163 81
4 fc -- * ------2 2 16
244 122
fc ------16 2
122 61
fc ------15 2
10 (fc = 4 MHz) (fc = 2 MHz)
fc ------15 2
122 61
4 fc -- * ------3 2 15
163 81
4 fc -- * ------2 2 15
244 122
fc ------15 2
122 61
fc ------14 2
11 (fc = 2 MHz) (fc = 1 MHz)
fc ------14 2
122 61
4 fc -- * ------3 2 14
162 81
4 fc -- * ------2 2 14
244 122
fc ------14 2
122 61
Note: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz]
Table 15-2 Setting of LCD Frame Frequency for low frequency clock
(b) At the SYSCR2 = "1". Frame Frequency [Hz] SLF Base Frequency [Hz] 1/4 Duty 1/3 Duty 1/2 Duty Static
00
fs ----9 2
(fs = 32.768 kHz)
fs ----9 2
64
4 fs -- * ----3 29
85
4 fs -- * ----2 29
128
fs ----9 2
64
01
fs ----8 2
(fs = 32.768 kHz)
fs ----8 2
128
4 fs -- * ----3 28
171 Reserved
4 fs -- * ----2 28
256
fs ----8 2
128
1*
Note: fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz]
Page 164
TMP86FS23UG
15.2.3 LCD drive voltage
LCD driving voltage VLCD is given as potential difference VDD - VLC between pins VDD and VLC. Therefore, when the CPU voltage and LCD drive voltage are the same, VLC pin will be connected to VSS pin. The LCD lights when the potential difference between segment output and common output is VLCD. Otherwise it turns off. During reset, the power switch of LCD driver is automatically turned off, shutting off the VLC voltage. After reset, if the P*LCR register (*; Port No.) for each port is set to "1" with LCDCR = "0", a GND level is output from the pin which can be used as segment. The power switch is turned on to supply VLC voltage to LCD driver by setting with LCDCR to "1". If the IDLE0, SLEEP0, or STOP mode is activated, LCDCR is automatically changed to "0" to blank the display. To turn the display back on after releasing from the previous mode, set LCDCR to "1" again.
Note:During reset, the LCD common outputs (COM3 to COM0) are fixed "0" level. However, the multiplex port (input/output port or SEG output is selectable) becomes high impedance. Therefore, when the reset input is long remarkably, ghost problem may appear in LCD display.
15.2.4 Adjusting the LCD panel drive capability
The LCD panel drive capability can be adjusted by programming LCDCR. When the period of enabling of the low bleeder resistor is lengthened, the drive capability becomes higher while the power consumption increases. Reversely, when the period of enabling of the low bleeder resistor is shortened, the drive capability becomes lower while the power consumption decreases. If the drive capability is not enough, the LCD display might present a ghost problem. So, implement the optimum drive capability for the LCD panel used. The figure below shows the bleeder resistance timing and equivalent circuit for 1/4 duty and 1/3 bias.
Frame frequency VDD VM1 VM2 VLCD When LCDCR "10B" RLt RLt VM RH RL High/low resistance switching signal VDD RH RL
RLt
RLt
RLt
When LCDCR = "00B" or "01B"
VM2 RLt RHt RLt RHt RLt RHt RLt RHt RLt RHt RH RL
(a) ON Timing for Low Bleeder Resistance
RH: High resistance RL: Low resistance
VLC VLC
RLt: Period during which resistance RL is selected (Time specified with LCDCR) RHt: Period during which resistance RH is selected (Time specified with LCDCR / 4 - Time specified with LCDCR)
(b) Equivalent Circuit for Bleeder Resistance
Figure 15-3 Bleeder Resistance Selection with LCDCR (for 1/4 duty and 1/3 bias)
Page 165
15. LCD Driver
15.3 LCD Display Operation TMP86FS23UG
15.3 LCD Display Operation
15.3.1 Display data setting
Display data is stored to the display data area (address 0F80H to 0F8FH,16 bytes) in the DBR. The display data stored in the display data area is automatically read out and sent to the LCD driver by the hardware. The LCD driver generates the segment signal and common signal according to the display data and driving method. Therefore, display patterns can be changed by only over writing the contents of display data area by the program. Table 15-4 shows the correspondence between the display data area and SEG/COM pins. LCD light when display data is "1" and turn off when "0". According to the driving method of LCD, the number of pixels which can be driven becomes different, and the number of bits in the display data area which is used to store display data also becomes different. Therefore, the bits which are not used to store display data as well as the data buffer which corresponds to the addresses not connected to LCD can be used to store general user process data (see Table 15-3). Table 15-3 Driving Method and Bit for Display Data
Driving methods 1/4 Duty 1/3 Duty 1/2 Duty Static Bit 7/3 COM3 - - - Bit 6/2 COM2 COM2 - - Bit 5/1 COM1 COM1 COM1 - Bit 4/0 COM0 COM0 COM0 COM0
Note: -: This bit is not used for display data
Table 15-4 LCD Display Data Area (DBR)
Address 0F80H 0F81H 0F82H 0F83H 0F84H 0F85H 0F86H 0F87H 0F88H 0F89H 0F8AH 0F8BH 0F8CH 0F8DH 0F8EH 0F8FH COM3 Bit 7 Bit 6 SEG1 SEG3 SEG5 SEG7 SEG9 SEG11 SEG13 SEG15 SEG17 SEG19 SEG21 SEG23 SEG25 SEG27 SEG29 SEG31 COM2 COM1 COM0 COM3 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 SEG0 SEG2 SEG4 SEG6 SEG8 SEG10 SEG12 SEG14 SEG16 SEG18 SEG20 SEG22 SEG24 SEG26 SEG28 SEG30 COM2 COM1 COM0 Bit 1 Bit 0
15.3.2 Blanking
Blanking is enabled when LCDCR is cleared to "0". To blank the LCD display and turn it off, a GND-level signal is output to the COM pin and the port which can be used as the segment by setting of P*LCR register (*; Port No.). At this time, the power switch of VLC pin is turned off.
Page 166
TMP86FS23UG
15.4 Control Method of LCD Driver
15.4.1 Initial setting
Figure 15-4 shows the flowchart of initialization. Example :To operate a 1/4 duty LCD of 32 segments x 4 com-mons at frame frequency fc/216 [Hz], The period of enabling of the low bleeder resistor: 28/fc
LD LD : : LD (LCDCR), 00000001B (P*LCR), 0FFH : : (LCDCR), 10000001B ; Sets the initial value of display data. ; Display enable ; Sets LCD driving method, The period of enabling of low bleeder resistor and frame frequency. ; Sets segment output control register. (*; Port No.)
Sets LCD driving method (DUTY). Sets frame frequency (SLF). Selects period of enabling of low resistor (LRSE). Sets segment output control registers (P*LCR (*; Port No.)) Initialization of display data area. Display enable (EDSP) (Releases from blanking.)
Figure 15-4 Initial Setting of LCD Driver 15.4.2 Store of display data
Generally, display data are prepared as fixed data in program memory (ROM) and stored in display data area by load command. Example :(1) To display using 1/4 duty LCD a numerical value which corresponds to the LCD data stored in data memory at address 80H (when pins COM and SEG are connected to LCD as in Figure 15-5), display data become as shown in Table 15-5.
LD ADD LD LD LD RET TABLE: DB 11011111B, 00000110B, 11100011B, 10100111B, 00110110B, 10110101B, 11110101B, 00010111B, 11110111B, 10110111B A, (80H) A, TABLE-$-7 HL, 0F85H W, (PC + A) (HL), W
Note:DB is a byte data definition instruction.
Page 167
15. LCD Driver
15.3 LCD Display Operation TMP86FS23UG
COM0 COM1 COM2 SEG10 SEG11 COM3
Figure 15-5 Example of COM, SEG Pin Connection (1/4 duty)
Table 15-5 Example of Display Data (1/4 duty)
No. Display Display data No. Display Display data
0
11011111
5
10110101
1
00000110
6
11110101
2
11100011
7
00000111
3
10100111
8
11110111
4
00110110
9
10110111
Example: (2) Table 15-6 shows an example of display data which are displayed using 1/2 duty LCD in the same way as Table 15-5. The connection between pins COM and SEG are the same as shown in Figure 15-6.
COM0 SEG13 SEG10 SEG12 SEG11 COM1
Figure 15-6 Example of COM, SEG Pin Connection
Page 168
TMP86FS23UG
Table 15-6 Example of Display Data (1/2 duty)
Display data Number High order address 0 1 2 3 4 **01**11 **00**10 **10**01 **10**10 **11**10 Low order address **01**11 **00**10 **01**11 **01**11 **00**10 5 6 7 8 9 Number High order address **11**10 **11**11 **01**10 **11**11 **11**10 Low order address **01**01 **01**01 **00**11 **01**11 **01**11 Display data
Note: *: Don't care
15.4.3 Example of LCD driver output
COM0 COM1 COM2 SEG10 SEG11 COM3
EDSP VLC SEG10 0 VLC SEG11 Display data area Address 0F85H 1011 0101 COM1 0 VLC COM0 0 VLC 0 VLC COM2 0 VLC COM3 0 VLCD COM0-SEG10 (Selected) 0 -VLCD VLCD COM2-SEG11 (Non selected) 0 -VLCD
Figure 15-7 1/4 Duty (1/3 Bias) Drive
Page 169
15. LCD Driver
15.3 LCD Display Operation TMP86FS23UG
SEG11 SEG12 SEG10 COM0 COM1 COM2
EDSP VLC SEG10 0 VLC Display data area Address 0F85H 0F86H *111 *010 **** *001 COM0 0 *: Don't care COM1 0 VLC COM2 0 VLCD COM0-SEG11 (Selected) 0 -VLCD VLCD COM1-SEG12 (Non selected) 0 -VLCD VLC SEG11 0 VLC SEG12 0 VLC
Figure 15-8 1/3 Duty (1/3 Bias) Drive
Page 170
TMP86FS23UG
SEG11 SEG12 SEG10 COM0 COM1 COM2
EDSP VDD SEG10 VLC Display data area Address 0F85H 0F86H *111 *010 **** *001 COM0 SEG11 VDD VLC VDD VLC VDD VLC VDD VLC VDD COM2 VLC VLCD COM0-SEG11 (Selected) 0 -VLCD VLCD 0 -VLCD
SEG12
*: Don't care
COM1
COM1-SEG12 (Non selected)
Figure 15-9 1/3 Duty (1/2 Bias) Drive
Page 171
15. LCD Driver
15.3 LCD Display Operation TMP86FS23UG
COM0 SEG13 SEG10 SEG12 SEG11
COM1
EDSP VDD SEG10 VLC VDD Display data area Address 0F85H 0F86H **01 **01 **11 **10 SEG13 SEG11 VLC VDD VLC VDD VLC VDD VLC VDD VLC VLCD COM0-SEG11 (Selected) 0 -VLCD VLCD 0 -VLCD
SEG12
*: Don't care
COM0
COM1
COM1-SEG12 (Non selected)
Figure 15-10 1/2 Duty (1/2 Bias) Drive
Page 172
TMP86FS23UG
SEG10 SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG11 SEG16 SEG12 SEG17 COM0
Display data area Address 0F85H 0F86H 0F87H 0F88H ***0 ***1 ***1 ***1 ***1 ***0 ***0 ***1 SEG17 VLC COM0 VDD VLC SEG14 EDSP VDD SEG10 VLC VDD VLC VDD *: Don't care
VLCD COM0-SEG10 (Selected) 0 -VLCD VLCD COM0-SEG14 (Non selected) 0 -VLCD
Figure 15-11 Static Drive
Page 173
15. LCD Driver
15.3 LCD Display Operation TMP86FS23UG
Page 174
TMP86FS23UG
16. Real-Time Clock
The TMP86FS23UG include a real time counter (RTC). A low-frequency clock can be used to provide a periodic interrupt (0.0625[s],0.125[s],0.25[s],0.50[s]) at a programmed interval, implement the clock function. The RTC can be used in the mode in which the low-frequency oscillator is active (except for the SLEEP0 mode).
16.1 Configuration
RTCCR Selector RTCSEL RTCRUN 211/fs 212/fs 213/fs 214/fs fs (32.768 kHz) Binary counter Interrupt request INTRTC
Figure 16-1 Configuration of the RTC
16.2 Control of the RTC
The RTC is controlled by the RTC control register (RTCCR). RTC Control Register
RTCCR (0017H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 RTCSEL 1 0 RTCRUN (Initial value: **** *000)
RTCSEL
Interrupt generation period (fs = 32.768 kHz)
00: 0.50 [s] 01: 0.25 [s] 10: 0.125 [s] 11: 0.0625 [s] 0: Stops and clears the binary counter. 1: Starts counting
R/W
RTCRUN
RTC control
Note 1: Program the RTCCR during low-frequency oscillation (when SYSCR2 = "1"). For selecting an interrupt generation period, program the RTCSEL when the timer is inactive (RTCRUN = "0"). During the timer operation, do not change the RTCSEL programming at the same moment the timer stops. Note 2: The timer automatically stops, and this register is initialized (the timer's binary counter is also initialized) if one of the following operations is performed while the timer is active: 1. Stopping the low-frequency oscillation (with SYSCR2 = "0") 2. When the TMP86FS23UG are put in STOP or SLEEP0 mode Therefore, before activating the timer after releasing from STOP or SLEEP0 mode, reprogram the registers again. Note 3: If a read instruction for RTCCR is executed, undefined value is set to bits 7 to 3. Note 4: If break processing is performed on the debugger for the development tool during the timer operation, the timer stops counting (contents of the RTCCR isn't altered). When the break is cancelled, processing is restarted from the point at which it was suspended.
Page 175
16. Real-Time Clock
16.3 Function TMP86FS23UG
16.3 Function
The RTC counts up on the internal low-frequency clock. When RTCCR is set to "1", the binary counter starts counting up. Each time the end of the period specified with RTCCR is detected, an INTRTC interrupt is generated, and the binary counter is cleared. The timer continues counting up even after the binary counter is cleared.
Page 176
TMP86FS23UG
17. Multiply-Accumulate (MAC) Unit
The TMP86FS23UG includes a multiply-accumulate (MAC) unit. The MAC unit is capable of executing 16-bit x 16-bit multiplications and 16-bit x 16-bit + 32-bit multiply-accumulate operations. The MAC unit supports only integer arithmetic, not fixed-point or floating-point arithmetic. Both signed and unsigned operations can be performed. The MAC unit can only be used in NORMAL1 or NORMAL2 mode. All the registers of the MAC unit are initialized upon entering a mode other than NORMAL mode. With development tools, if break mode is entered while the MAC unit is calculating, the calculation is continued but its result is unpredictable. In this case, the calculation must be re-executed after break mode is exited. Do not write to the multiplicand register in break mode. When the calculation is completed, it is possible to enter break mode and read the calculation result in break mode.
17.1 Configuration
Control circuit
Arithmetic unit
Temporary register 1
Temporary register 2
Temporary register 3
Command register
Status register
Multiplier register
Multiplicand register
Result register
Figure 17-1 MAC Unit
17.2 Registers
The MAC unit consists of the following registers: Table 17-1 Registers in the MAC Unit
Register Command register (MACCR) Status register (MACSR) Multiplier data register (MPLDRH, MPLDRL) Multiplicand data register (MPCDRH, MPCDRL) Result register (RCALDR4 to RCALDR1) Addend register (MADDR4 to MADDR1) Address 0FA4H 0FA5H 0FA7H, 0FA6H 0FA9H, 0FA8H 0FAAH to 0FADH 0FAAH to 0FADH Number of Bits 8 bits 8 bits 16 bits 16 bits 32 bits 32 bits
17.2.1 Command Register
The command register is used to enable and disable the MAC unit, specify the arithmetic mode, and clear the result register.
Page 177
17. Multiply-Accumulate (MAC) Unit
17.3 Control TMP86FS23UG
17.2.2 Status Register
The status register contains flags to indicate the operation status of the MAC unit and the calculation result.
17.2.3 Multiplier data Register
The data written to this register is calculated as a multiplier.
17.2.4 Multiplicand data Register
The data written to this register is calculated as a multiplicand.
17.2.5 Result Register
The calculation result is stored in this register.
17.2.6 Addend Register
The data written to this register is calculated as an addend in a multiply-accumulate operation. An addend must be written to this register while calculation is not being performed (CALC = "0").
17.3 Control
Command Register
MACCR (0FA4H) 7 RCLR 6 "1" 5 "1" 4 "1" 3 2 CMOD 1 0 EMAC (Initial value: 0111 0000)
RCLR
Result register clear
0: -(Keeps the value of the result register.) 1: Clears the result register. (This bit is automatically cleared to "0" one machine cycle after it is set to "1".) 000: Unsigned multiply (16 bits x 16 bits) 001: Unsigned multiply-accumulate (16 bits x 16 bits + 32 bits) 010: Signed multiply (16 bits x 16 bits) 011: Signed multiply-accumulate (16 bits x 16 bits + 32 bits) 1**: Reserved 0: Disables the MAC unit. 1: Enables the MAC unit.
CMOD
Arithmetic mode
R/W
EMAC
MAC unit control
Note 1: Setting RCLR to "1" causes the result, addend, and status registers to be initialized. The multiplier, multiplicand, and command registers remain the same as before. (RCLR is automatically cleared to "0" one machine cycle after it is set to "1".) Note 2: Writing to CMOD (including an overwrite) makes no changes to the status, multiplier, multiplicand, result, and addend registers. Note 3: Before changing the arithmetic mode, be sure to check that calculation is not being performed (CALC = "0"). Note 4: Clearing the result register with RCLR is possible only when calculation is not being performed (CALC = "0"). (RCLR cannot be set to "1"during calculation.) Note 5: Bits 6 to 4 are always read as "1". ( "0" cannot be written.)
Status Register
MACSR (0FA5H) 7 "1" 6 "1" 5 "1" 4 CARF 3 ZERF 2 SIGN 1 OVRF 0 CALC (Initial value: 1110 0000)
Page 178
TMP86FS23UG
CARF ZERF SIGN OVRF CALC
Carry flag Zero flag Sign flag Overflow flag Operation status flag
0: No carry occurred in multiply-accumulate operation. 1: Carry occurred in multiply-accumulate operation. 0: Calculation resulst is other than "00000000H". 1: Calculation result is "00000000H". 0: Result register contents are positive or "00000000H". 1: Result register contents are negative. 0: Overflow occurred. 1: No overflow occurred. 0: Calculation not in progress 1: Calculation in progress Read only
Note 1: The status register is initialized when the result register is cleared (RCLR = "1"). Note 2: CARF, ZERF, SIGN, and OVRF are programmed at the end of calculation. They are not affected by a read from the status register. Note 3: ZERF and SIGN are not affected by a write to the addend register. Note 4: In multiply mode, OVRF and CARF are always read as "0". Note 5: Bit 7 to 5 are always read as "1".
Multiplier data Register
MPLDRH, MPLDRL (0FA7H, 0FA6H) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MPLDRH (0FA7H) MPLDRL (0FA6H) (Initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000) R/W
Note: In signed arithmetic mode, bit 15 is treated as the sign bit.
Multiplicand data Register
MPCDRH, MPCDRL (0FA9H, 0FA8H) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MPCDRH (0FA9H) MPCDRL (0FA8H) (Initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000) R/W
Note 1: In signed arithmetic mode, bit 15 is treated as the sign bit. Note 2: Calculation can only be started by writing to both the lower byte (MPCDRL) and upper byte (MPCDRH) of the multiplicand register in this order. Note 3: The multiplicand register can only be programmed when data is written in the order of lower byte and upper byte. If data is only written to the upper byte, the written data cannot be read out. (If data is only written to the lower byte, the written data can be read out.)
Result Register
RCALDR4, RCALDR3 (0FADH, 0FACH) 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 RCALDR4 (0FADH) RCALDR3 (0FACH) (Initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000) RCALDR2, RCALDR1 (0FABH, 0FAAH) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read only
RCALDR2 (0FABH)
RCALDR1 (0FAAH) (Initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000) Read only
Note: In signed arithmetic mode, bit 31 contains the sign of the calculation result.
Addend Register
MADDR4, MADDR3 (0FADH, 0FACH) 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 MADDR4 (0FADH) MADDR3 (0FACH) (Initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000) MADDR2, MADDR1 (0FABH, 0FAAH) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write only
MADDR2 (0FABH)
MADDR1 (0FAAH) (Initial value: 0000 0000 0000 0000) Write only
Page 179
17. Multiply-Accumulate (MAC) Unit
17.4 Register Description TMP86FS23UG
Note 1: In signed arithmetic mode, bit 31 is treated as the sign bit. Note 2: Writing to the addend register changes the contents of the result register. Thus, read from the result register before writing to the addend register.
17.4 Register Description
17.4.1 EMAC
Setting MACCR to "1" enables the MAC unit. Once enabled, the MAC unit remains enabled until it is disabled.
17.4.2 CMOD
The MACCR is used to specify the arithmetic mode. Calculation is started automatically when data is written to both the lower byte (MPCDRL) and upper byte (MPCDRH) of the multiplicand register in this order. Thus, the multiplier register (MPLDRH, MPLDRL) must be set before the multiplicand register. When calculation is completed, the result is stored in the result register (RCALDR4 to RCALDR1). The arithmetic mode is valid until the CMOD field is changed. Note that if the operation mode is changed to IDLE0/1/2, SLOW1/2, or STOP mode, CMOD is initialized. During calculation, the next data can be written to the multiplier and multiplicand registers only once. Do not write to these registers more than once. Whether or not calculation is in progress can be checked by reading the MACSR flag.
Note 1: Before changing the arithmetic mode, ensure that calculation is not being performed (CALC = "0"). Note 2: Writing to the CMOD field (including an overwrite) makes no changes to the status, multiplier, multiplicand, result, and addend registers. Thus, to clear the status, result, and addend registers after a change of the arithmetic mode, set the RCLR bit to "1".
17.4.3 RCLR
When calculation is not being performed (CALC = "0"), setting MACCR to "1" causes the result, addend, and status registers to be initilized. (The multiplier and multiplicand registers remain the same as before.) RCLR is automatically cleared to "0" one machine cycle after it is set to "1"
Note:When calculation is in progress (CALC = "1"), RCLR cannot be set to "1". (The instruction to set it to "1" is invalid.)
As shown in Table 17-2, the state of each register changes when: the MAC unit is disabled (EMAC = "0"); the result register is cleared (RCLR = "1"); or the operation mode is changed. Table 17-2 Effects of the EMAC and RCLR Bits on the MAC Registers
Register EMAC = "0" (Disable) Bits other than EMAC remain the same as before Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized RCLR = "1" (register clear) Bits other than RCLR remain the same as before. RCLR is cleared to "0" after one machine cycle. Initialized Remains the same as before Remains the same as before Initialized Initialized IDLE0/1/2, SLOW1/2, or STOP Mode Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized
Command register (MACCR) Status register (MACSR) Multiplier data register (MPLDRH, MPLDRL) Multiplicand data register (MPCDRH, MPCDRL) Result register (RCALDR4 to RCALDR1) Addend register (MADDR4 toMADDR1)
Note 1: The multiplier, multiplicand, and addend registers can be written to only when the MAC unit is enabled (EMAC = "1"). Note 2: When writing to the multiplicand register, be sure to write to the lower byte (MPCDRL) first and then to the upper byte (MPCDRH). Note 3: RCLR can be written to only when calculation is not being performed (CALC = "0").
Page 180
TMP86FS23UG
Note 4: When the MAC unit is enabled (EMAC = "1"), if the operation mode is changed to IDLE0/1/2, SLOW1/2, or STOP mode, the command register (MACCR) is initialized and its contents are discarded. Thus, program the MACCR again after each of these operation modes is exited.
17.5 Arithmetic Modes
The following four arithmetic modes are available: 1. Unsigned multiply (16 bits x 16 bits) 2. Signed multiply (16 bits x 16 bits) 3. Unsigned multiply-accumulate (16 bits x 16 bits + 32 bits) 4. Signed multiply-accumulate (16 bits x 16 bits + 32 bits)
17.5.1 Unsigned Multiply Mode
Setting the MACCR field in the command register to "000B" places the MAC unit in unsigned multiply mode. In this mode, the values of the multiplier and multiplicand registers are each treated as 16-bit data for calculation. Calculation is started automatically by writing a multiplier to the multiplier register (MPLDRH, MPLDRL) and then writing a multiplicand to the lower byte (MPCDRL) and upper byte (MPCDRH) of the multiplicand register in this order. The calculation result is stored as 32-bit data in the result register (RCALDR4 to RCALDR1). (The previous calculation result is cleared.)
17.5.2 Signed Multiply Mode
Setting the MACCR field in the command register to "010B" places the MAC unit in signed multiply mode. In this mode, bit 15 in the multiplier and multiplicand registers is each treated as the sign bit. Calculation is started automatically by writing a multiplier to the multiplier register (MPLDRH, MPLDRL) and then writing a multiplicand to the lower byte (MPCDRL) and upper byte (MPCDRH) of the multiplicand register in this order. The calculation result is stored as 32-bit data in the result register (RCALDR4 to RCALDR1). (Bit 31 contains the sign, and the previous calculation result is cleared.) The sign of the calculation result varies depending on the signs of the multiplier and multiplicand, as shown in Table 17-3. Table 17-3 Signs Used in Singed Multiply Mode
Sign of Multiplier 0 0 1 1 Sign of Multiplicand 0 1 0 1 Sign of Calculation Result 0 1 1 0
17.5.3 Unsigned Multiply-Accumulate Mode
Setting the MACCR field in the command register to "001B" places the MAC unit in unsigned multiply-accumulate mode. In this mode, the values of the multiplier and multiplicand registers are each treated as 16-bit data for calculation. Calculation is started automatically by writing a multiplier to the multiplier register (MPLDRH, MPLDRL) and then writing a multiplicand to the lower byte (MPCDRH) and upper byte (MPCDRH) of the multiplicand register in this order. First, the multiplier and multiplicand are multiplied. Then, the contents of the addend register are added to the product. The sum is stored as 32-bit data in the result register. In unsigned multiply-accumulate mode, any addend can be written to the addend register when calculation is not being performed. If, for example, A x B is executed after arbitrary data C is written to the addend register, the result of A x B + C is stored in the result register (RCALDR4 to RCALDR1). Setting the RCLR bit to "1"
Page 181
17. Multiply-Accumulate (MAC) Unit
17.6 Status Flags TMP86FS23UG
causes the result and addend registers to be cleared. After calculation is completed, the contents of the result register are automatically stored in the addend register. Thus, if the contents of the addend register are not changed, the result of the previous multiply-accumulate operation is used as an addend for the next calculation.
Note 1: Be sure to write to the addend register when calculation is not being performed (CALC = "0"). Note 2: Writing to the addend register changes the contents of the result register. Thus, read from the result register before writing to the addend register.
17.5.4 Signed Multiply-Accumulate Mode
Setting the MACCR field in the command register to "011B" places the MAC unit in signed multiply-accumulate mode. In this mode, bit 15 in the multiplier and multiplicand register is each treated as the sign bit. Calculation is started automatically by writing a multiplier to the multiplier register (MPLDRH, MPLDRL) and then writing a multiplicand to the lower byte (MPCDRL) and upper byte (MPCDRH) of the multiplicand register in this order. First, the multiplicand and multiplicand are multiplied. Then, the contents of the addend register are added to the product. The sum is stored as signed 32-bit data in the result register (RCALDR4 to RCALDR1). The sign of the result varies as shown in Table 17-4. As in the case of unsigned multiply-accumulate mode, any addend can be written to the addend register when calculation is not being performed.
Note: In signed multiply-accumulate mode, bit 31 in the addend register is treated as the sign bit.
Table 17-4 Signs Used in Sgined Multiply-Accumulate Mode
Sign of Product 0 0 1 1 Sign of Addend 0 1 0 1 Sign (bit 31) of Calculation Result When OVRF = "0" 0 "1" when sum < 0 "0" when sum 0 "1" when sum < 0 "0" when sum 0 1 When OVRF = "1" 1 - - 0
17.5.5 Valid Numerical Ranges
Table 17-5 shows the numerical range that can be handled in each arithmetic mode. Table 17-5 Valid Numerical Ranges in Decimal (with hexadecimal shown in brackets)
Mode Unsigned multiply Signed multiply Unsigned multiplyaccumulate Signed multiplyaccumulate Multiplier/Multiplicand 0 to 65535 (0000H to FFFFH) -32768 to 32767 (8000H to 7FFFH) 0 to 65535 (0000H to FFFFH) -32768 to 32767 (8000H to 7FFFH) Addend - - 0 to 4294967295 (00000000H to FFFFFFFFH) -2147483648 to 2147483647 (80000000H to 7FFFFFFFH) Sum 0 to 4294836225 (00000000H to FFFE0001H) -1073709056 to 1073741824 (C0008000H to 40000000H) 0 to 4294967295 (00000000H to FFFFFFFFH) -2147483648 to 2147483647 (80000000H~7FFFFFFFH)
17.6 Status Flags
The status register MACSR contains the following five flags. OVRF, CARF, SIGN, and ZERF are programmed when calculation is completed, and these flags are not affected by a read from the status register. 1. Operation status flag (CALC) 2. Overflow flag (OVRF) 3. Carry flag (CARF) 4. Sign flag (SIGN) 5. Zero flag (ZERF)
Page 182
TMP86FS23UG
17.6.1 Operation Status Flag (CALC)
CALC indicates the status of the MAC unit. It is set to "1" when calculation is in progress and "0" when calculation is not in progress.
17.6.2 Overflow Flag (OVRF)
OVRF is set to "1" if the sum of positive values is negative or the sum of negative values is positive in signed multiply-accumulate mode. In other cases, it is cleared to "0".
Note:In multiply mode, OVRF is always read as "0".
17.6.3 Carry Flag (CARF)
CARF is set to "1" if a carry occurs in the highest-order bit (bit 31) in a multiply-accumulate operation. In other cases, it is cleared to "0".
Note: In multiply mode, CARF is always read as "0".
17.6.4 Sign Flag (SIGN)
SIGN contains the same data as the highest-order bit (bit 31) of the calculation result (regardless of whether calculation is performed in signed or unsigned mode).
Note:SIGN is programmed by the calculation result. This flag is not affected by a write to the addend register.
17.6.5 Zero Flag (ZERF)
ZERF is set to "1" if the result register contains "00000000H". In other cases, it is cleared to "0". It is also set to "1" if the result register contains "00000000H" after an overflow or carry has occurred.
Note:ZERF is programmed by the calculation result. This flag is not affected by a write to the addend register.
17.7 Example of Software Processing
The following shows an example of calculating X = x + y + z. The calculation time is 3s when fc = 8 MHz. The multiplier and multiplicand are separately stored in data RAM. The W and A registers are used as general-purpose registers. The general-purpose registers are not saved on the stack. The processing for enabling/disabling the MAC unit is not included.
Note 1: If the operation mode is changed by processing an interrupt during calculation, the correct calculation result may not be obtained. Thus, before starting calculation, be sure to execute the DI instruction to disable interrupts. Note 2: Before reading the result register after calculation is started, check that the CALC flag in the MACSR register is "0" or wait for at least three machine cycles (e.g. NOP x 3).
Instruction DI LD LD LD LD ; The next data can be written in succession. WA, (RAM_Multiplier ) (MPLDRL), WA WA, (RAM_Multiplier x) (MPCDRL), WA ; Multiplicand register ; Multiplier register
Processing Time (Disables interrupts.) 6 cycles/3 s 6 cycles/3 s 6 cycles/3 s 6 cycles/3 s
Page 183
17. Multiply-Accumulate (MAC) Unit
17.7 Example of Software Processing TMP86FS23UG
LD LD LD LD ; The first calculation is already completed. Thus, the next data can be written. LD LD LD LD
WA, (RAM_Multiplier ) (MPLDRL), WA WA, (RAM_Multiplicand Z) (MPCDRL), WA ; Multiplicand register ; Multiplier register
6 cycles/3 s 6 cycles/3 s 6 cycles/3 s 6 cycles/3 s
WA, (RAM_Multiplier y) (MPLDRL), WA WA, (RAM_Multiplicand Z) (MPCDRL), WA ; Multiplicand register ; Multiplier register
6 cycles/3 s 6 cycles/3 s 6 cycles/3 s 6 cycles/3 s
NOP NOP NOP
; Wait three machine cycles or longer. ; (Note 2)
LD
WA, (RCALDR1) (RAM_Low-order part of result X), WA WA, (RCALDR3) (RAM_High-order part of result X), WA
; Low-order part of the result register
6 cycles/3 s
LD
6 cycles/3 s ; High-order part of the result register
LD
6 cycles/3 s
LD EI
6 cycles/3 s (Enables interrupts.)
Processing time
51 ms
RET
6 cycles/3 s 6 cycles/3 s
Total processing time
57 s
Page 184
TMP86FS23UG
18. Flash Memory
TMP86FS23UG has 61440byte flash memory (address: 1000H to FFFFH). The write and erase operations to the flash memory are controlled in the following three types of mode. - MCU mode The flash memory is accessed by the CPU control in the MCU mode. This mode is used for software bug correction and firmware change after shipment of the device since the write operation to the flash memory is available by retaining the application behavior. - Serial PROM mode The flash memory is accessed by the CPU control in the serial PROM mode. Use of the serial interface (UART) enables the flash memory to be controlled by the small number of pins. TMP86FS23UG in the serial PROM mode supports on-board programming which enables users to program flash memory after the microcontroller is mounted on a user board. - Parallel PROM mode The parallel PROM mode allows the flash memory to be accessed as a stand-alone flash memory by the program writer provided by the third party. High-speed access to the flash memory is available by controlling address and data signals directly. For the support of the program writer, please ask Toshiba sales representative.
In the MCU and serial PROM modes, the flash memory control register (FLSCR) is used for flash memory control. This chapter describes how to access the flash memory using the flash memory control register (FLSCR) in the MCU and serial PROM modes.
Page 185
18. Flash Memory
18.1 Flash Memory Control TMP86FS23UG
18.1 Flash Memory Control
The flash memory is controlled via the flash memory control register (FLSCR) and flash memory stanby control resister (FLSSTB). Flash Memory Control Register
FLSCR (0FFFH) 7 6 FLSMD 5 4 3 BANKSEL 2 1 0 (Initial value : 1100 1***)
FLSMD
Flash memory command sequence execution control Flash memory bank select control (Serial PROM mode only)
1100: Disable command sequence execution 0011: Enable command sequence execution Others: Reserved 0: Select BANK0 1: Select BANK1
R/W
BANKSEL
R/W
Note 1: The command sequence of the flash memory can be executed only when FLSMD="0011B". In other cases, any attempts to execute the command sequence are ineffective. Note 2: FLSMD must be set to either "1100B" or "0011B". Note 3: BANKSEL is effective only in the serial PROM mode. In the MCU mode, the flash memory is always accessed with actual addresses (1000-FFFFH) regardless of BANKSEL. Note 4: Bits 2 through 0 in FLSCR are always read as don't care.
Flash Memory Standby Control Register
FLSSTB (0FE9H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FSTB (Initial value : **** ***0)
FSTB
Flash memory standby control
0: Disable the standby function. 1: Enable the standby function.
Write only
Note 1: When FSTB is set to 1, do not execute the read/write instruction to the flash memory because there is a possibility that the expected data is not read or the program is not operated correctly. If executing the read/write instruction, FSTB is initialized to 0 automatically. Note 2: If an interrupt is issued when FSTB is set to 1, FSTB is initialized to 0 automatically and then the vector area of the flash memory is read. Note 3: If the IDLE0/1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 or STOP mode is activated when FSTB is set to 1, FSTB is initialized to 0 automatically. In the IDLE0/1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 or STOP mode, the standby function operates regardless of FSTB setting.
18.1.1 Flash Memory Command Sequence Execution Control (FLSCR)
The flash memory can be protected from inadvertent write due to program error or microcontroller misoperation. This write protection feature is realized by disabling flash memory command sequence execution via the flash memory control register (write protect). To enable command sequence execution, set FLSCR to "0011B". To disable command sequence execution, set FLSCR to "1100B". After reset, FLSCR is initialized to "1100B" to disable command sequence execution. Normally, FLSCR should be set to "1100B" except when the flash memory needs to be written or erased.
18.1.2 Flash Memory Bank Select Control (FLSCR)
In the serial PROM mode, a 2-kbyte BOOTROM is mapped to addresses 7800H-7FFFH and the flash memory is mapped to 2 banks at 8000H-FFFFH. Flash memory addresses 1000H-7FFFH are mapped to 9000HFFFFH as BANK0, and flash memory addresses 8000H-FFFFH are mapped to 8000H-FFFFH as BANK1. FLSCR is used to switch between these banks. For example, to access the flash memory address 7000H, set FLSCR to "0" and then access F000H. To access the flash memory address 9000H, set FLSCR to "1" and then access 9000H. In the MCU mode, the flash memory is accessed with actual addresses at 1000H-FFFFH. In this case, FLSCR is ineffective (i.e., its value has no effect on other operations).
Page 186
TMP86FS23UG
Table 18-1 Flash Memory Access
Operating Mode MCU mode FLSCR Don't care 0 (BANK0) Serial PROM mode 1 (BANK1) 8000H-FFFFH 1000H-7FFFH Access Area 1000H-FFFFH 9000H-FFFFH Specified Address
18.1.3 Flash Memory Standby Control (FLSSTB)
Low power consumption is enabled by cutting off the steady-state current of the flash memory. In the IDLE0/1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 or STOP mode, the steady-state current of the flash memory is cut off automatically. When the program is executed in the RAM area (without accessing the flash memory) in the NORMAL 1/2 or SLOW1/2 mode, the current can be cut off by the control of the register. To cut off the steady-state current of the flash memory, set FLSSTB to "1" by the control program in the RAM area. The procedures for controlling the FLSSTB register are explained below.
(Steps1 and 2 are controlled by the program in the flash memory, and steps 3 through 8 are controlled by the write control program executed in the RAM area.) 1. Transfer the control program of the FLSSTB register to the RAM area. 2. Jump to the RAM area. 3. Disable (DI) the interrupt master enable flag (IMF = "0"). 4. Set FLSSTB to "1". 5. Execute the user program. 6. Repeat step 5 until the return request to the flash memory is detected. 7. Set FLSSTB to "0". 8. Jump to the flash memory area.
Note 1: The standby function is not operated by setting FLSSTB with the program in the flash memory. You must set FLSSTB by the program in the RAM area. Note 2: To use the standby function by setting FLSSTB to "1" with the program in the RAM area, FLSSTB must be set to "0" by the program in the RAM area before returning the program control to the flash memory. If the program control is returned to the flash memory with FLSSTB set to "1", the program may misoperate and run out of control.
Page 187
18. Flash Memory
18.2 Command Sequence TMP86FS23UG
18.2 Command Sequence
The command sequence in the MCU and the serial PROM modes consists of six commands (JEDEC compatible), as shown in Table 18-2. Addresses specified in the command sequence are recognized with the lower 12 bits (excluding BA, SA, and FF7FH used for read protection). The upper 4 bits are used to specify the flash memory area, as shown in Table 18-3. Table 18-2 Command Sequence
Command Sequence 1st Bus Write Cycle Address 1 Byte program Sector Erase (4-kbyte Erase) Chip Erase (All Erase) Product ID Entry Product ID Exit 5 Product ID Exit 6 Read Protect 555H 555H AAH AAH AAAH AAAH 55H 55H 555H 555H F0H A5H FF7FH 00H 555H Data AAH 2nd Bus Write Cycle Address AAAH Data 55H 3rd Bus Write Cycle Address 555H Data A0H 4th Bus Write Cycle Address BA (Note 1) 555H Data Data (Note 1) AAH 5th Bus Write Cycle Address Data 6th Bus Write Cycle Address SA (Note 2) 555H Data -
2
555H
AAH
AAAH
55H
555H
80H
AAAH
55H
30H
3 4
555H 555H XXH
AAH AAH F0H
AAAH AAAH -
55H 55H -
555H 555H -
80H 90H -
555H -
AAH -
AAAH -
55H -
10H -
Note 1: Set the address and data to be written. Note 2: The area to be erased is specified with the upper 4 bits of the address.
Table 18-3 Address Specification in the Command Sequence
Operating Mode MCU mode FLSCR Don't care 0 (BANK0) Serial PROM mode 1 (BANK1) 8***H-F***H Specified Address 1***H-F***H 9***H-F***H
18.2.1 Byte Program
This command writes the flash memory for each byte unit. The addresses and data to be written are specified in the 4th bus write cycle. Each byte can be programmed in a maximum of 40 s. The next command sequence cannot be executed until the write operation is completed. To check the completion of the write operation, perform read operations repeatedly until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. During the write operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1).
Note:To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
18.2.2 Sector Erase (4-kbyte Erase)
This command erases the flash memory in units of 4 kbytes. The flash memory area to be erased is specified by the upper 4 bits of the 6th bus write cycle address. For example, in the MCU mode, to erase 4 kbytes from 7000H to 7FFFH, specify one of the addresses in 7000H-7FFFH as the 6th bus write cycle. In the serial PROM mode, to erase 4 kbytes from 7000H to 7FFFH, set FLSCR to "0" and then specify one of the addresses in F000H-FFFFH as the 6th bus write cycle. The sector erase command is effective only in the MCU and serial PROM modes, and it cannot be used in the parallel PROM mode. Page 188
TMP86FS23UG
A maximum of 30 ms is required to erase 4 kbytes. The next command sequence cannot be executed until the erase operation is completed. To check the completion of the erase operation, perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. During the erase operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1).
18.2.3 Chip Erase (All Erase)
This command erases the entire flash memory in approximately 30 ms. The next command sequence cannot be executed until the erase operation is completed. To check the completion of the erase operation, perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. During the erase operation, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1). After the chip is erased, all bytes contain FFH.
18.2.4 Product ID Entry
This command activates the Product ID mode. In the Product ID mode, the vendor ID, the flash ID, and the read protection status can be read from the flash memory. Table 18-4 Values To Be Read in the Product ID Mode
Address F000H F001H Meaning Vendor ID Flash macro ID 98H 41H 0EH: 0BH: 07H: F002H Flash size 05H: 03H: 01H: 00H: FFH: FF7FH Read protection status Other than FFH: Read protection enabled 60 kbytes 48 kbytes 32 kbytes 24 kbytes 16 kbytes 8 kbytes 4 kbytes Read protection disabled Read Value
Note: The value at address F002H (flash size) depends on the size of flash memory incorporated in each product. For example, if the product has 60-kbyte flash memory, "0EH" is read from address F002H.
18.2.5 Product ID Exit
This command is used to exit the Product ID mode.
18.2.6 Read Protect
This command enables the read protection setting in the flash memory. When the read protection is enabled, the flash memory cannot be read in the parallel PROM mode. In the serial PROM mode, the flash write and RAM loader commands cannot be executed. To enable the read protection setting in the serial PROM mode, set FLSCR to "1" before executing the read protect command sequence. To disable the read protection setting, it is necessary to execute the chip erase command sequence. Whether or not the read protection is enabled can be checked by reading FF7FH in the Product ID mode. For details, see Table 18-4.
Page 189
18. Flash Memory
18.3 Toggle Bit (D6) TMP86FS23UG
It takes a maximum of 40 s to set read protection in the flash memory. The next command sequence cannot be executed until this operation is completed. To check the completion of the read protect operation, perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. During the read protect operation, any attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 of the data (toggling between 0 and 1).
18.3 Toggle Bit (D6)
After the byte program, chip erase, and read protect command sequence is executed, any consecutive attempts to read from the same address is reversed bit 6 (D6) of the data (toggling between 0 and 1) until the operation is completed. Therefore, this toggle bit provides a software mechanism to check the completion of each operation. Usually perform read operations repeatedly for data polling until the same data is read twice from the same address in the flash memory. After the byte program, chip erase, or read protect command sequence is executed, the initial read of the toggle bit always produces a "1".
Page 190
TMP86FS23UG
18.4 Access to the Flash Memory Area
When the write, erase and read protections are set in the flash memory, read and fetch operations cannot be performed in the entire flash memory area. Therefore, to perform these operations in the entire flash memory area, access to the flash memory area by the control program in the BOOTROM or RAM area. (The flash memory program cannot write to the flash memory.) The serial PROM or MCU mode is used to run the control program in the BOOTROM or RAM area.
Note 1: The flash memory can be written or read for each byte unit. Erase operations can be performed either in the entire area or in units of 4 kbytes, whereas read operations can be performed by an one transfer instruction. However, the command sequence method is adopted for write and erase operations, requiring several-byte transfer instructions for each operation. Note 2: To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
18.4.1 Flash Memory Control in the Serial PROM Mode
The serial PROM mode is used to access to the flash memory by the control program provided in the BOOTROM area. Since almost of all operations relating to access to the flash memory can be controlled simply by the communication data of the serial interface (UART), these functions are transparent to the user. For the details of the serial PROM mode, see "Serial PROM Mode." To access to the flash memory by using peripheral functions in the serial PROM mode, run the RAM loader command to execute the control program in the RAM area. The procedures to execute the control program in the RAM area is shown in " 18.4.1.1 How to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the RAM area (in the RAM loader mode within the serial PROM mode) ".
18.4.1.1 How to write to the flash memory by executing the control program in the RAM area (in the RAM loader mode within the serial PROM mode)
(Steps 1 and 2 are controlled by the BOOTROM, and steps 3 through 10 are controlled by the control program executed in the RAM area.) 1. Transfer the write control program to the RAM area in the RAM loader mode. 2. Jump to the RAM area. 3. Disable (DI) the interrupt master enable flag (IMF"0"). 4. Set FLSCR to "0011B" (to enable command sequence execution). 5. Execute the erase command sequence. 6. Read the same flash memory address twice. (Repeat step 6 until the same data is read by two consecutive reads operations.) 7. Specify the bank to be written in FLSCR. 8. Execute the write command sequence. 9. Read the same flash memory address twice. (Repeat step 9 until the same data is read by two consecutive reads operations.) 10. Set FLSCR to "1100B" (to disable command sequence execution).
Note 1: Before writing to the flash memory in the RAM area, disable interrupts by setting the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) to "0". Usually disable interrupts by executing the DI instruction at the head of the write control program in the RAM area. Note 2: Since the watchdog timer is disabled by the BOOTROM in the RAM loader mode, it is not required to disable the watchdog timer by the RAM loader program.
Page 191
18. Flash Memory
18.4 Access to the Flash Memory Area TMP86FS23UG
Example :After chip erasure, the program in the RAM area writes data 3FH to address F000H.
DI LD LD LD LD (FLSCR),0011_1000B IX,0F555H IY,0FAAAH HL,0F000H : Disable interrupts (IMF"0") : Enable command sequence execution.
; #### Flash Memory Chip erase Process #### LD LD LD LD LD LD sLOOP1: LD CMP JR SET (IX),0AAH (IY),55H (IX),80H (IX),0AAH (IY),55H (IX),10H W,(IX) W,(IX) NZ,sLOOP1 (FLSCR).3 : Loop until the same value is read. : Set BANK1. : 1st bus write cycle : 2nd bus write cycle : 3rd bus write cycle : 4th bus write cycle : 5th bus write cycle : 6th bus write cycle
; #### Flash Memory Write Process #### LD LD LD LD sLOOP2: LD CMP JR LD sLOOP3: JP (IX),0AAH (IY),55H (IX),0A0H (HL),3FH W,(HL) W,(HL) NZ,sLOOP2 (FLSCR),1100_1000B sLOOP3 : Loop until the same value is read. : Disable command sequence execution. : 1st bus write cycle : 2nd bus write cycle : 3rd bus write cycle : 4th bus write cycle, (F000H)=3FH
Page 192
TMP86FS23UG
18.4.2 Flash Memory Control in the MCU mode
In the MCU mode, write operations are performed by executing the control program in the RAM area. Before execution of the control program, copy the control program into the RAM area or obtain it from the external using the communication pin. The procedures to execute the control program in the RAM area in the MCU mode are described below.
18.4.2.1 How to write to the flash memory by executing a user write control program in the RAM area (in the MCU mode)
(Steps 1 and 2 are controlled by the program in the flash memory, and steps 3 through 11 are controlled by the control program in the RAM area.) 1. Transfer the write control program to the RAM area. 2. Jump to the RAM area. 3. Disable (DI) the interrupt master enable flag (IMF"0"). 4. Disable the watchdog timer, if it is used. 5. Set FLSCR to "0011B" (to enable command sequence execution). 6. Execute the erase command sequence. 7. Read the same flash memory address twice. (Repeat step 7 until the same data is read by two consecutive read operations.) 8. Execute the write command sequence. (It is not required to specify the bank to be written.) 9. Read the same flash memory address twice. (Repeat step 9 until the same data is read by two consecutive read operations.) 10. Set FLSCR to "1100B" (to disable command sequence execution). 11. Jump to the flash memory area.
Note 1: Before writing to the flash memory in the RAM area, disable interrupts by setting the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) to "0". Usually disable interrupts by executing the DI instruction at the head of the write control program in the RAM area. Note 2: When writing to the flash memory, do not intentionally use non-maskable interrupts (the watchdog timer must be disabled if it is used). If a non-maskable interrupt occurs while the flash memory is being written, unexpected data is read from the flash memory (interrupt vector), resulting in malfunction of the microcontroller.
Page 193
18. Flash Memory
18.4 Access to the Flash Memory Area TMP86FS23UG
Example :After sector erasure (E000H-EFFFH), the program in the RAM area writes data 3FH to address E000H.
DI LD LDW LD LD LD LD (WDTCR2),4EH (WDTCR1),0B101H (FLSCR),0011_1000B IX,0F555H IY,0FAAAH HL,0E000H : Disable interrupts (IMF"0") : Clear the WDT binary counter. : Disable the WDT. : Enable command sequence execution.
; #### Flash Memory Sector Erase Process #### LD LD LD LD LD LD sLOOP1: LD CMP JR (IX),0AAH (IY),55H (IX),80H (IX),0AAH (IY),55H (HL),30H W,(IX) W,(IX) NZ,sLOOP1 : Loop until the same value is read. : 1st bus write cycle : 2nd bus write cycle : 3rd bus write cycle : 4th bus write cycle : 5th bus write cycle : 6th bus write cycle
; #### Flash Memory Write Process #### LD LD LD LD sLOOP2: LD CMP JR LD JP (IX),0AAH (IY),55H (IX),0A0H (HL),3FH W,(HL) W,(HL) NZ,sLOOP2 (FLSCR),1100_1000B XXXXH : Loop until the same value is read. : Disable command sequence execution. : Jump to the flash memory area. : 1st bus write cycle : 2nd bus write cycle : 3rd bus write cycle : 4th bus write cycle, (1000H)=3FH
Example :This write control program reads data from address F000H and stores it to 98H in the RAM area.
LD LD A,(0F000H) (98H),A : Read data from address F000H. : Store data to address 98H.
Page 194
TMP86FS23UG
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.1 Outline
The TMP86FS23UG has a 2048 byte BOOTROM (Mask ROM) for programming to flash memory. The BOOTROM is available in the serial PROM mode, and controlled by TEST, BOOT and RESET pins. Communication is performed via UART. The serial PROM mode has seven types of operating mode: Flash memory writing, RAM loader, Flash memory SUM output, Product ID code output, Flash memory status output, Flash memory erasing and Flash memory read protection setting. Memory address mapping in the serial PROM mode differs from that in the MCU mode. Figure 19-1 shows memory address mapping in the serial PROM mode. Table 19-1 Operating Range in the Serial PROM Mode
Parameter Power supply High frequency (Note) Min 4.5 2 Max 5.5 16 Unit V MHz
Note: Though included in above operating range, some of high frequencies are not supported in the serial PROM mode. For details, refer to "Table 19-5".
19.2 Memory Mapping
The Figure 19-1 shows memory mapping in the Serial PROM mode and MCU mode. In the serial PROM mode, the BOOTROM (Mask ROM) is mapped in addresses from 7800H to 7FFFH. The flash memory is divided into two banks for mapping. Therefore, when the RAM loader mode (60H) is used, it is required to specify the flash memory address according to Figure 19-1 (For detail of banks and control register, refer to the chapter of "Flash Memory Control Register".) To use the Flash memory writing command (30H), specify the flash memory addresses from 1000H to FFFFH, that is the same addresses in the MCU mode, because the BOOTROM changes the flash memory address.
0000H
0000H
SFR RAM
003FH 0040H
083FH 0F80H
64 bytes
2048 bytes
SFR RAM
003FH 0040H
083FH 0F80H
64 bytes
2048 bytes
DBR
0FFFH
128 bytes
DBR
0FFFH 1000H
128 bytes
7800H
BOOTROM
7FFFH 8000H 9000H
2048 bytes Flash memory
7FFFH 8000H
61440 bytes
Flash memory
28672 bytes (BANK0) FFFFH
32768 bytes (BANK1) FFFFH
Serial PROM mode
MCU mode
Figure 19-1 Memory Address Maps
Page 195
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.3 Serial PROM Mode Setting TMP86FS23UG
19.3 Serial PROM Mode Setting
19.3.1 Serial PROM Mode Control Pins
To execute on-board programming, activate the serial PROM mode. Table 19-2 shows pin setting to activate the serial PROM mode. Table 19-2 Serial PROM Mode Setting
Pin TEST pin BOOT/RXD pin
RESET pin
Setting High High
Note: The BOOT pin is shared with the UART communication pin (RXD pin) in the serial PROM mode. This pin is used as UART communication pin after activating serial PROM mode
19.3.2 Pin Function
In the serial PROM mode, TXD (P11) and RXD (P10) are used as a serial interface pin. Table 19-3 Pin Function in the Serial PROM Mode
Pin Name (Serial PROM Mode) TXD BOOT/RXD
RESET
Input/ Output Output Input/Input Input Input Power supply Power supply Power supply Serial data output
Function P11 (Note 1) P10
Pin Name (MCU Mode)
Serial PROM mode control/Serial data input Serial PROM mode control Fixed to high 4.5 to 5.5 V
RESET
TEST VDD, AVDD
TEST
VSS
0V
VAREF
Leave open or apply input reference voltage. These ports are in the high-impedance state in the serial PROM mode. The input level is fixed to the port inputs with a hardware feature to prevent overlap current. (The port inputs are invalid.) To make the port inputs valid, set the pin of the SPCR register to "1" by the RAM loader control program. Low output in the serial PROM mode Connect to GND or apply LCD drive voltage.
I/O (Output) ports except P11, P10
I/O (Output)
COM3 to COM0 VLC XIN XOUT
Output Power supply Input
Self-oscillate with an oscillator. Output
(Note 2)
Note 1: During on-board programming with other parts mounted on a user board, be careful no to affect these communication control pins. Note 2: Operating range of high frequency in serial PROM mode is 2 MHz to 16 MHz.
Page 196
TMP86FS23UG
TMP86FS23UG
VDD(4.5 V to 5.5 V) VDD
Serial PROM mode TEST MCU mode
XIN pull-up
BOOT / RXD (P10) TXD (P11)
XOUT VSS GND
External control
RESET
Figure 19-2 Serial PROM Mode Pin Setting
Note 1: For connection of other pins, refer to " Table 19-3 Pin Function in the Serial PROM Mode ".
19.3.3 Example Connection for On-Board Writing
Figure 19-3 shows an example connection to perform on-board wring.
VDD(4.5 V to 5.5 V) VDD Serial PROM mode TEST MCU mode Pull-up Level converter (Note 2) Other parts (Note 1) RESET XIN XOUT VSS GND RC power-on reset circuit RESET control
BOOT / RXD (P10) TXD (P11)
PC control
Application board
External control board
Figure 19-3 Example Connection for On-Board Writing
Note 1: When other parts on the application board effect the UART communication in the serial PROM mode, isolate these pins by a jumper or switch. Note 2: When the reset control circuit on the application board effects activation of the serial PROM mode, isolate the pin by a jumper or switch. Note 3: For connection of other pins, refer to " Table 19-3 Pin Function in the Serial PROM Mode ".
Page 197
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.3 Serial PROM Mode Setting TMP86FS23UG
19.3.4 Activating the Serial PROM Mode
The following is a procedure to activate the serial PROM mode. " Figure 19-4 Serial PROM Mode Timing " shows a serial PROM mode timing. 1. Supply power to the VDD pin. 2. Set the RESET pin to low. 3. Set the TEST pin and BOOT/RXD pins to high. 4. Wait until the power supply and clock oscillation stabilize. 5. Set the RESET pin to high. 6. Input the matching data (5AH) to the BOOT/RXD pin after setup sequence. For details of the setup timing, refer to " 19.16 UART Timing ".
VDD
TEST(Input)
RESET(Input)
PROGRAM
don't care
Reset mode
Serial PROM mode
BOOT/RXD (Input)
High level setting
Setup time for serial PROM mode (Rxsup) Matching data input
Figure 19-4 Serial PROM Mode Timing
Page 198
TMP86FS23UG
19.4 Interface Specifications for UART
The following shows the UART communication format used in the serial PROM mode. To perform on-board programming, the communication format of the write controller must also be set in the same manner. The default baud rate is 9600 bps regardless of operating frequency of the microcontroller. The baud rate can be modified by transmitting the baud rate modification data shown in Table 1-4 to TMP86FS23UG. The Table 19-5 shows an operating frequency and baud rate. The frequencies which are not described in Table 19-5 can not be used. - Baud rate (Default): 9600 bps - Data length: 8 bits - Parity addition: None - Stop bit: 1 bit Table 19-4 Baud Rate Modification Data
Baud rate modification data Baud rate (bps) 04H 76800 05H 62500 06H 57600 07H 38400 0AH 31250 18H 19200 28H 9600
Page 199
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.4 Interface Specifications for UART TMP86FS23UG
Table 19-5 Operating Frequency and Baud Rate in the Serial PROM Mode
Reference Baud Rate (bps) (Note 3) Baud Rate Modification Data Ref. Frequency (MHz) 1 2 2 4 4.19 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 9.8304 10 12 8 12.288 12.5 9 10 14.7456 16 Rating (MHz) 1.91 to 2.10 3.82 to 4.19 3.82 to 4.19 4.70 to 5.16 4.70 to 5.16 5.87 to 6.45 5.87 to 6.45 7.05 to 7.74 7.64 to 8.39 9.40 to 10.32 9.40 to 10.32 11.75 to 12.90 11.75 to 12.90 11.75 to 12.90 14.10 to 15.48 15.27 to 16.77 76800 04H Baud rate (bps) 76800 78125 76923 62500 05H 57600 06H 38400 07H 31250 0AH 19200 18H 9600 28H
(%) 0.00 +1.73 +0.16
(bps) -
(%) -
(bps) 57600 57692 59077 60096 57600 -
(%) 0.00 +0.16 +2.56 +4.33 0.00 -
(bps) 38400 39063 38462 38400 39063 38400 38462
(%) 0.00 +1.73 +0.16 0.00 +1.73 0.00 +0.16
(bps) 31250 32734 31250 31250 32000 30048 31250
(%) 0.00 +4.75 0.00 0.00 +2.40 -3.85 0.00
(bps) 19231 20144 19200 19531 19200 19231 19200 19531 18750 19200 19531 19200 19231
(%) +0.16 +4.92 0.00 +1.73 0.00 +0.16 0.00 +1.73 -2.34 0.00 +1.73 0.00 +0.16
(bps) 9615 9615 10072 9600 9766 9375 9600 9600 9615 9600 9766 9375 9600 9766 9600 9615
(%) +0.16 +0.16 +4.92 0.00 +1.73 -2.34 0.00 0.00 +0.16 0.00 +1.73 -2.34 0.00 +1.73 0.00 +0.16
3
4 5 6 7
62500 60096 62500
0.00 -3.85 0.00
Note 1: "Ref. Frequency" and "Rating" show frequencies available in the serial PROM mode. Though the frequency is supported in the serial PROM mode, the serial PROM mode may not be activated correctly due to the frequency difference in the external controller (such as personal computer) and oscillator, and load capacitance of communication pins. Note 2: It is recommended that the total frequency difference is within 3% so that auto detection is performed correctly by the reference frequency. Note 3: The external controller must transmit the matching data (5AH) repeatedly till the auto detection of baud rate is performed. This number indicates the number of times the matching data is transmitted for each frequency.
Page 200
TMP86FS23UG
19.5 Operation Command
The eight commands shown in Table 19-6 are used in the serial PROM mode. After reset release, the TMP86FS23UG waits for the matching data (5AH). Table 19-6 Operation Command in the Serial PROM Mode
Command Data 5AH F0H 30H 60H 90H C0H C3H FAH Setup Flash memory erasing Flash memory writing RAM loader Flash memory SUM output Product ID code output Flash memory status output Flash memory read protection setting Operating Mode Description Matching data. Execute this command after releasing the reset. Erases the flash memory area (address 1000H to FFFFH). Writes to the flash memory area (address 1000H to FFFFH). Writes to the specified RAM area (address 0050H to 083FH). Outputs the 2-byte checksum upper byte and lower byte in this order for the entire area of the flash memory (address 1000H to FFFFH). Outputs the product ID code (13-byte data). Outputs the status code (7-byte data) such as the read protection condition. Enables the read protection.
19.6 Operation Mode
The serial PROM mode has seven types of modes, that are (1) Flash memory erasing, (2) Flash memory writing, (3) RAM loader, (4) Flash memory SUM output, (5) Product ID code output, (6) Flash memory status output and (7) Flash memory read protection setting modes. Description of each mode is shown below. 1. Flash memory erasing mode The flash memory is erased by the chip erase (erasing an entire flash area) or sector erase (erasing sectors in 4-kbyte units). The erased area is filled with FFH. When the read protection is enabled, the sector erase in the flash erasing mode can not be performed. To disable the read protection, perform the chip erase. Before erasing the flash memory, TMP86FS23UG checks the passwords except a blank product. If the password is not matched, the flash memory erasing mode is not activated. 2. Flash memory writing mode Data is written to the specified flash memory address for each byte unit. The external controller must transmit the write data in the Intel Hex format (Binary). If no error is encountered till the end record, TMP86FS23UG calculates the checksum for the entire flash memory area (1000H to FFFFH), and returns the obtained result to the external controller. When the read protection is enabled, the flash memory writing mode is not activated. In this case, perform the chip erase command beforehand in the flash memory erasing mode. Before activating the flash memory writing mode, TMP86FS23UG checks the password except a blank product. If the password is not matched, flash memory writing mode is not activated. 3. RAM loader mode The RAM loader transfers the data in Intel Hex format sent from the external controller to the internal RAM. When the transfer is completed normally, the RAM loader calculates the checksum. After transmitting the results, the RAM loader jumps to the RAM address specified with the first data record in order to execute the user program. When the read protection is enabled, the RAM loader mode is not activated. In this case, perform the chip erase beforehand in the flash memory erasing mode. Before activating the RAM loader mode, TMP86FS23UG checks the password except a blank product. If the password is not matched, flash RAM loader mode is not activated. 4. Flash memory SUM output mode The checksum is calculated for the entire flash memory area (1000H to FFFFH), and the result is returned to the external controller. Since the BOOTROM does not support the operation command to read the flash memory, use this checksum to identify programs when managing revisions of application programs. 5. Product ID code output The code used to identify the product is output. The code to be output consists of 13-byte data, which includes the information indicating the area of the ROM incorporated in the product. The external controller reads this code, and recognizes the product to write. (In the case of TMP86FS23UG, the addresses from 1000H to FFFFH become the ROM area.) Page 201
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.6 Operation Mode TMP86FS23UG
6. Flash memory status output mode The status of the area from FFE0H to FFFFH, and the read protection condition are output as 7-byte code. The external controller reads this code to recognize the flash memory status. 7. Flash memory read protection setting mode This mode disables reading the flash memory data in parallel PROM mode. In the serial PROM mode, the flash memory writing and RAM loader modes are disabled. To disable the flash memory read protection, perform the chip erase in the flash memory erasing mode.
Page 202
TMP86FS23UG
19.6.1 Flash Memory Erasing Mode (Operating command: F0H)
Table 19-7 shows the flash memory erasing mode. Table 19-7 Flash Memory Erasing Mode
Transfer Byte 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from the External Controller to TMP86FS23UG Matching data (5AH) 9600 bps 9600 bps Baud Rate Transfer Data from TMP86FS23UG to the External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: No data transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (F0H) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted) OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Checksum (Upper byte) (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Checksum (Lower byte) (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted -
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate change data (Table 19-4) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
5th byte 6th byte
Operation command data (F0H) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte 8th byte
Password count storage address bit 15 to 08 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
9th byte 10th byte
Password count storage address bit 07 to 00 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
BOOT ROM
11th byte 12th byte
Password comparison start address bit 15 to 08 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
13th byte 14th byte
Password comparison start address bit 07 to 00 (Note 4, 5)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
15th byte : m'th byte
Password string (Note 4, 5) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
n'th - 2 byte n'th - 1 byte
Erase area specification (Note 2) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
n'th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
n'th + 1 byte
Modified baud rate
Note 1: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of xxh. Note 2: Refer to " 19.13 Specifying the Erasure Area ". Note 3: Refer to " 19.8 Checksum (SUM) ". Note 4: Refer to " 19.10 Passwords ". Note 5: Do not transmit the password string for a blank product. Note 6: When a password error occurs, TMP86FS23UG stops UART communication and enters the halt mode. Therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode. Note 7: If an error occurs during transfer of a password address or a password string, TMP86FS23UG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. Therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Description of the flash memory erasing mode 1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. Page 203
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.6 Operation Mode TMP86FS23UG
2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory erasing mode (F0H). 3. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 19-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, F0H). If the 5th byte of the received data does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of the operation command error code (63H). 4. The 7th thorough m'th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. In the case of a blank product, do not transmit a password string. (Do not transmit a dummy password string.) 5. The n'th - 2 byte contains the erasure area specification data. The upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits specify the start address and end address of the erasure area, respectively. For the detailed description, see "1.13 Specifying the Erasure Area". 6. The n'th - 1 byte and n'th byte contain the upper and lower bytes of the checksum, respectively. For how to calculate the checksum, refer to "1.8 Checksum (SUM)". Checksum is calculated unless a receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs. After sending the end record, the external controller judges whether the transmission is completed correctly by receiving the checksum sent by the device. 7. After sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 204
TMP86FS23UG
19.6.2 Flash Memory Writing Mode (Operation command: 30H)
Table 19-8 shows flash memory writing mode process. Table 19-8 Flash Memory Writing Mode Process
Transfer Byte 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FS23UG Matching data (5Ah) 9600 bps 9600 bps Baud Rate Transfer Data from TMP86FS23UG to External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (30H) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted) OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted Modified baud rate Modified baud rate OK: SUM (Upper byte) (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: SUM (Lower byte) (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted -
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate modification data (See Table 19-4) Operation command data (30H) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
5th byte 6th byte
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte 8th byte
Password count storage address bit 15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
9th byte 10th byte
Password count storage address bit 07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
BOOT ROM
11th byte 12th byte
Password comparison start address bit 15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
13th byte 14th byte
Password comparison start address bit 07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
15th byte : m'th byte
Password string (Note 5) -
Modified baud rate
m'th + 1 byte : n'th - 2 byte n'th - 1 byte
Intel Hex format (binary) (Note 2)
n'th byte
-
Modified baud rate
n'th + 1 byte
(Wait state for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
Note 1: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 19.7 Error Code ". Note 2: Refer to " 19.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) ". Note 3: Refer to " 19.8 Checksum (SUM) ". Note 4: Refer to " 19.10 Passwords ". Note 5: If addresses from FFE0H to FFFFH are filled with "FFH", the passwords are not compared because the device is considered as a blank product. Transmitting a password string is not required. Even in the case of a blank product , it is required to specify the password count storage address and the password comparison start address. Transmit these data from the external controller. If a password error occurs due to incorrect password count storage address or password comparison start address, TMP86FS23UG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. Therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial ROM mode. Note 6: If the read protection is enabled or a password error occurs, TMP86FS23UG stops UART communication and enters the halt confition. In this case, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial ROM mode. Note 7: If an error occurs during the reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FS23UG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. In this case, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Page 205
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.6 Operation Mode TMP86FS23UG
Description of the flash memory writing mode 1. The 1st byte of the received data contains the matching data. When the serial PROM mode is activated, TMP86FS23UG (hereafter called device), waits to receive the matching data (5AH). Upon reception of the matching data, the device automatically adjusts the UART's initial baud rate to 9600 bps. 2. When receiving the matching data (5AH), the device transmits an echo back data (5AH) as the second byte data to the external controller. If the device can not recognize the matching data, it does not transmit the echo back data and waits for the matching data again with automatic baud rate adjustment. Therefore, the external controller should transmit the matching data repeatedly till the device transmits an echo back data. The transmission repetition count varies depending on the frequency of device. For details, refer to Table 19-5. 3. The 3rd byte of the received data contains the baud rate modification data. The five types of baud rate modification data shown in Table 19-4 are available. Even if baud rate is not modified, the external controller should transmit the initial baud rate data (28H: 9600 bps). 4. Only when the 3rd byte of the received data contains the baud rate modification data corresponding to the device's operating frequency, the device echoes back data the value which is the same data in the 4th byte position of the received data. After the echo back data is transmitted, baud rate modification becomes effective. If the 3rd byte of the received data does not contain the baud rate modification data, the device enters the halts condition after sending 3 bytes of baud rate modification error code (62H). 5. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data (30H) to write the flash memory. 6. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, 30H). If the 5th byte of the received data does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of the operation command error code (63H). 7. The 7th byte contains the data for 15 to 8 bits of the password count storage address. When the data received with the 7th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 8. The 9th byte contains the data for 7 to 0 bits of the password count storage address. When the data received with the 9th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 9. The 11th byte contains the data for 15 to 8 bits of the password comparison start address. When the data received with the 11th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 10. The 13th byte contains the data for 7 to 0 bits of the password comparison start address. When the data received with the 13th byte has no receiving error, the device does not send any data. If a receiving error or password error occurs, the device does not send any data and enters the halt condition. 11. The 15th through m'th bytes contain the password data. The number of passwords becomes the data (N) stored in the password count storage address. The external password data is compared with Nbyte data from the address specified by the password comparison start address. The external controller should send N-byte password data to the device. If the passwords do not match, the device enters the halt condition without returning an error code to the external controller. If the addresses from FFE0H to FFFFH are filled with "FFH", the passwords are not conpared because the device is considered as a blank product. 12. The m'th + 1 through n'th - 2 bytes of the received data contain the binary data in the Intel Hex format. No received data is echoed back to the external controller. After receiving the start mark (3AH for ":") in the Intel Hex format, the device starts data record reception. Therefore, the received data except 3AH is ignored until the start mark is received. After receiving the start mark, the device receives the data record, that consists of data length, address, record type, write data and checksum. Since the device starts checksum calculation after receiving an end record, the external controller should wait for the checksum after sending the end record. If a receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs, the device enters the halts condition without returning an error code to the external controller. 13. The n'th - 1 and n'th bytes contain the checksum upper and lower bytes. For details on how to calculate the SUM, refer to " 19.8 Checksum (SUM) ". The checksum is calculated only when the end record is detected and no receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs. After sending the end Page 206
TMP86FS23UG
record, the external controller judges whether the transmission is completed correctly by receiving the checksum sent by the device. 14. After transmitting the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Note 1: Do not write only the address from FFE0H to FFFFH when all flash memory data is the same. If only these area are written, the subsequent operation can not be executed due to password error. Note 2: To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
Page 207
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.6 Operation Mode TMP86FS23UG
19.6.3 RAM Loader Mode (Operation Command: 60H)
Table 19-9 shows RAM loader mode process. Table 19-9 RAM Loader Mode Process
Transfer Bytes 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FS23UG Matching data (5AH) 9600 bps 9600 bps Baud Rate Transfer Data from TMP86FS23UG to External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (60H) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate OK: SUM (Upper byte) (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: SUM (Lower byte) (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate modification data (See Table 19-4) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
5th byte 6th byte
Operation command data (60H) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte 8th byte
Password count storage address bit 15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
9th byte 10th byte BOOT ROM
Password count storage address bit 07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
11th byte 12th byte
Password comparison start address bit 15 to 08 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
13th byte 14th byte
Password comparison start address bit 07 to 00 (Note 4)
Modified baud rate
15th byte : m'th byte
Password string (Note 5) -
Modified baud rate
m'th + 1 byte : n'th - 2 byte n'th - 1 byte
Intel Hex format (Binary) (Note 2)
n'th byte
-
Modified baud rate
RAM
-
The program jumps to the start address of RAM in which the first transferred data is written.
Note 1: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 19.7 Error Code ". Note 2: Refer to " 19.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) ". Note 3: Refer to " 19.8 Checksum (SUM) ". Note 4: Refer to " 19.10 Passwords ". Note 5: If addresses from FFE0H to FFFFH are filled with "FFH", the passwords are not compared because the device is considered as a blank product. Transmitting a password string is not required. Even in the case of a blank product , it is required to specify the password count storage address and the password comparison start address. Transmit these data from the external controller. If a password error occurs due to incorrect password count storage address or password comparison start address, TMP86FS23UG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. Therefore, when a password error occurs, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial ROM mode. Note 6: After transmitting a password string, the external controller must not transmit only an end record. If receiving an end record after a password string, the device may not operate correctly. Note 7: If the read protection is enabled or a password error occurs, TMP86FS23UG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. In this case, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Page 208
TMP86FS23UG
Note 8: If an error occurs during the reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FS23UG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition. In this case, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Description of RAM loader mode 1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contains the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. In the 5th byte of the received data contains the RAM loader command data (60H). 3. When th 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position (in this case, 60H). If the 5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H). 4. The 7th through m'th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 5. The m'th + 1 through n'th - 2 bytes of the received data contain the binary data in the Intel Hex format. No received data is echoed back to the external controller. After receiving the start mark (3AH for ":") in the Intel Hex format, the device starts data record reception. Therefore, the received data except 3AH is ignored until the start mark is received. After receiving the start mark, the device receives the data record, that consists of data length, address, record type, write data and checksum. The writing data of the data record is written into RAM specified by address. Since the device starts checksum calculation after receiving an end record, the external controller should wait for the checksum after sending the end record. If a receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs, the device enters the halts condition without returning an error code to the external controller. 6. The n'th - 1 and n'th bytes contain the checksum upper and lower bytes. For details on how to calculate the SUM, refer to " 19.8 Checksum (SUM) ". The checksum is calculated only when the end record is detected and no receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs. After sending the end record, the external controller judges whether the transmission is completed correctly by receiving the checksum sent by the device. 7. After transmitting the checksum to the external controller, the boot program jumps to the RAM address that is specified by the first received data record.
Note 1: To rewrite data to Flash memory addresses at which data (including FFH) is already written, make sure to erase the existing data by "sector erase" or "chip erase" before rewriting data.
Page 209
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.6 Operation Mode TMP86FS23UG
19.6.4 Flash Memory SUM Output Mode (Operation Command: 90H)
Table 19-10 shows flash memory SUM output mode process. Table 19-10 Flash Memory SUM Output Process
Transfer Bytes 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FS23UG Matching data (5AH) 9600 bps 9600 bps Baud Rate Transfer Data from TMP86FS23UG to External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (90H) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) OK: SUM (Upper byte) (Note 2) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: SUM (Lower byte) (Note 2) Error: Nothing transmitted -
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate modification data (See Table 19-4) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
BOOT ROM
5th byte 6th byte
Operation command data (90H) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte
-
Modified baud rate
8th byte
-
Modified baud rate
9th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
Note 1: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 19.7 Error Code ". Note 2: Refer to " 19.8 Checksum (SUM) ".
Description of the flash memory SUM output mode 1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contains the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory SUM output mode (90H). 3. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, 90H). If the 5th byte of the received data does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H). 4. The 7th and the 8th bytes contain the upper and lower bits of the checksum, respectively. For how to calculate the checksum, refer to " 19.8 Checksum (SUM) ". 5. After sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 210
TMP86FS23UG
19.6.5 Product ID Code Output Mode (Operation Command: C0H)
Table 19-11 shows product ID code output mode process. Table 19-11 Product ID Code Output Process
Transfer Bytes 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FS23UG Matching data (5AH) 9600 bps 9600 bps Baud Rate Transfer Data from TMP86FS23UG to External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (C0H) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) 3AH 0AH 02H 1DH 00H 00H 00H 01H 10H Start mark The number of transfer data (from 9th to 18th bytes) Length of address (2 bytes) Reserved data Reserved data Reserved data Reserved data ROM block count (1 block) First address of ROM (Upper byte) First address of ROM (Lower byte) End address of ROM (Upper byte) End address of ROM (Lower byte) Checksum of transferred data (9th through 18th byte)
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate modification data (See Table 19-4) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
5th byte 6th byte
Operation command data (C0H) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte BOOT ROM 11th byte 12th byte 13th byte 14th byte 15th byte
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
16th byte
Modified baud rate
00H
17th byte
Modified baud rate
FFH
18th byte
Modified baud rate
FFH
19th byte (Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
D2H
20th byte
Modified baud rate
-
Note: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 19.7 Error Code ".
Description of Product ID code output mode 1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the product ID code output mode command data (C0H). 3. When the 5th byte contains the operation command data shown in Table 19-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, C0H). If the 5th byte data does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H). 4. The 9th through 19th bytes contain the product ID code. For details, refer to " 19.11 Product ID Code ". Page 211
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.6 Operation Mode TMP86FS23UG
5. After sending the checksum, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 212
TMP86FS23UG
19.6.6 Flash Memory Status Output Mode (Operation Command: C3H)
Table 19-12 shows Flash memory status output mode process. Table 19-12 Flash Memory Status Output Mode Process
Transfer Bytes 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FS23UG Matching data (5AH) Baud Rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Transfer Data from TMP86FS23UG to External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (C3H) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) 3AH 04H Start mark Byte count (from 9th to 12th byte) Status code 1
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate modification data (See Table 19-4) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
5th byte 6th byte
Operation command data (C3H) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte 8th byte BOOT ROM
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
9th byte
Modified baud rate
00H to 03H 00H 00H 00H
10th byte 11th byte 12th byte 13th byte
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
Reserved data Reserved data Reserved data
Checksum 2's complement for the sum of 9th through 12th bytes 9th byte Checksum 00H: 00H 01H: FFH 02H: FEH 03H: FDH -
14th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
Note 1: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 19.7 Error Code ". Note 2: For the details on status code 1, refer to " 19.12 Flash Memory Status Code ".
Description of Flash memory status output mode 1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the Flash memory writing mode. 2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the flash memory status output mode command data (C3H). 3. When the 5th byte contains the operation command data shown in Table 19-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in this case, C3H). If the 5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H). 4. The 9th through 13th bytes contain the status code. For details on the status code, refer to " 19.12 Flash Memory Status Code ". 5. After sending the status code, the device waits for the next operation command data.
Page 213
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.6 Operation Mode TMP86FS23UG
19.6.7 Flash Memory Read Protection Setting Mode (Operation Command: FAH)
Table 19-13 shows Flash memory read protection setting mode process. Table 19-13 Flash Memory Read Protection Setting Mode Process
Transfer Bytes 1st byte 2nd byte Transfer Data from External Controller to TMP86FS23UG Matching data (5AH) Baud Rate 9600 bps 9600 bps Transfer Data from TMP86FS23UG to External Controller - (Automatic baud rate adjustment) OK: Echo back data (5AH) Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Echo back data Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 62H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Echo back data (FAH) Error: A1H x 3, A3H x 3, 63H x 3 (Note 1) OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: Nothing transmitted Error: Nothing transmitted OK: FBH (Note 3) Error: Nothing transmitted -
3rd byte 4th byte
Baud rate modification data (See Table 19-4) -
9600 bps 9600 bps
5th byte 6th byte
Operation command data (FAH) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
7th byte 8th byte
Password count storage address 15 to 08 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
BOOT ROM
9th byte 10th byte
Password count storage address 07 to 00 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
11th byte 12th byte
Password comparison start address 15 to 08 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
13th byte 14th byte
Password comparison start address 07 to 00 (Note 2)
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
15th byte : m'th byte
Password string (Note 2) -
Modified baud rate Modified baud rate
n'th byte
-
Modified baud rate
n'+1th byte
(Wait for the next operation command data)
Modified baud rate
Note 1: "xxH x 3" indicates that the device enters the halt condition after sending 3 bytes of xxH. For details, refer to " 19.7 Error Code ". Note 2: Refer to " 19.10 Passwords ". Note 3: If the read protection is enabled for a blank product or a password error occurs for a non-blank product, TMP86FS23UG stops UART communication and enters the halt mode. In this case, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode. Note 4: If an error occurs during reception of a password address or a password string, TMP86FS23UG stops UART communication and enters the halt mode. In this case, initialize TMP86FS23UG by the RESET pin and reactivate the serial PROM mode.
Description of the Flash memory read protection setting mode 1. The 1st through 4th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the Flash memory writing mode. 2. The 5th byte of the received data contains the command data in the flash memory status output mode (FAH). 3. When the 5th byte of the received data contains the operation command data shown in Table 1-6, the device echoes back the value which is the same data in the 6th byte position of the received data (in Page 214
TMP86FS23UG
this case, FAH). If the 5th byte does not contain the operation command data, the device enters the halt condition after transmitting 3 bytes of operation command error code (63H). 4. The 7th through m'th bytes of the transmitted and received data contain the same data as in the flash memory writing mode. 5. The n'th byte contains the status to be transmitted to the external controller in the case of the successful read protection.
Page 215
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.7 Error Code TMP86FS23UG
19.7 Error Code
When detecting an error, the device transmits the error code to the external controller, as shown in Table 19-14. Table 19-14 Error Code
Transmit Data 62H, 62H, 62H 63H, 63H, 63H A1H, A1H, A1H A3H, A3H, A3H Meaning of Error Data Baud rate modification error. Operation command error. Framing error in the received data. Overrun error in the received data.
Note: If a password error occurs, TMP86FS23UG does not transmit an error code.
19.8 Checksum (SUM)
19.8.1 Calculation Method
The checksum (SUM) is calculated with the sum of all bytes, and the obtained result is returned as a word. The data is read for each byte unit and the calculated result is returned as a word. Example:
A1H B2H C3H D4H
If the data to be calculated consists of the four bytes, the checksum of the data is as shown below. A1H + B2H + C3H + D4H = 02EAH SUM (HIGH)= 02H SUM (LOW)= EAH
The checksum which is transmitted by executing the flash memory write command, RAM loader command, or flash memory SUM output command is calculated in the manner, as shown above.
Page 216
TMP86FS23UG
19.8.2 Calculation data
The data used to calculate the checksum is listed in Table 19-15.
Table 19-15 Checksum Calculation Data
Operating Mode Flash memory writing mode Flash memory SUM output mode RAM loader mode Product ID Code Output mode Flash Memory Status Output mode Data in the entire area of the flash memory Calculation Data Description Even when a part of the flash memory is written, the checksum of the entire flash memory area (1000H to FFFH) is calculated. The data length, address, record type and checksum in Intel Hex format are not included in the checksum. The length of data, address, record type and checksum in Intel Hex format are not included in the checksum. For details, refer to " 19.11 Product ID Code ". For details, refer to " 19.12 Flash Memory Status Code " When the sector erase is executed, only the erased area is used to calculate the checksum. In the case of the chip erase, an entire area of the flash memory is used.
RAM data written in the first received RAM address through the last received RAM address 9th through 18th bytes of the transferred data 9th through 12th bytes of the transferred data All data in the erased area of the flash memory (the whole or part of the flash memory)
Flash Memory Erasing mode
Page 217
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary) TMP86FS23UG
19.9 Intel Hex Format (Binary)
1. After receiving the checksum of a data record, the device waits for the start mark (3AH ":") of the next data record. After receiving the checksum of a data record, the device ignores the data except 3AH transmitted by the external controller. 2. After transmitting the checksum of end record, the external controller must transmit nothing, and wait for the 2-byte receive data (upper and lower bytes of the checksum). 3. If a receiving error or Intel Hex format error occurs, the device enters the halt condition without returning an error code to the external controller. The Intel Hex format error occurs in the following case: When the record type is not 00H, 01H, or 02H When a checksum error occurs When the data length of an extended record (record type = 02H) is not 02H When the device receives the data record after receiving an extended record (record type = 02H) with extended address of 1000H or larger. When the data length of the end record (record type = 01H) is not 00H
19.10Passwords
The consecutive eight or more-byte data in the flash memory area can be specified to the password. TMP86FS23UG compares the data string specified to the password with the password string transmitted from the external controller. The area in which passwords can be specified is located at addresses 1000H to FF9FH. The area from FFA0H to FFFFH can not be specified as the passwords area. If addresses from FFE0H through FFFFH are filled with "FFH", the passwords are not compared because the product is considered as a blank product. Even in this case, the password count storage addresses and password comparison start address must be specified. Table 19-16 shows the password setting in the blank product and nonblank product. Table 19-16 Password Setting in the Blank Product and Non-Blank Product
Password PNSA (Password count storage address) PCSA (Password comparison start address) N (Password count) Password string setting Blank Product (Note 1) 1000H PNSA FF9FH 1000H PCSA FF9FH Non-Blank Product 1000H PNSA FF9FH
1000H PCSA FFA0 - N
* Not required (Note 5)
8N Required (Note 2)
Note 1: When addresses from FFE0H through FFFFH are filled with "FFH", the product is recognized as a blank product. Note 2: The data including the same consecutive data (three or more bytes) can not be used as a password. (This causes a password error data. TMP86FS23UG transmits no data and enters the halt condition.) Note 3: *: Don't care. Note 4: When the above condition is not met, a password error occurs. If a password error occurs, the device enters the halt condition without returning the error code. Note 5: In the flash memory writing mode or RAM loader mode, the blank product receives the Intel Hex format data immediately after receiving PCSA without receiving password strings. In this case, the subsequent processing is performed correctly because the blank product ignores the data except the start mark (3AH ":") as the Intel Hex format data, even if the external controller transmits the dummy password string. However, if the dummy password string contains "3AH", it is detected as the start mark erroneously. The microcontroller enters the halt mode. If this causes the problem, do not transmit the dummy password strings. Note 6: In the flash memory erasing mode, the external controller must not transmit the password string for the blank product.
Page 218
TMP86FS23UG
UART
RXD pin
F0H 12H F1H 07H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H PNSA PCSA Password string
08H
Flash memory
F012H
08H "08H" becomes the umber of Compare passwords
F107H F108H F109H F10AH F10BH Example PNSA = F012H PCSA = F107H Password string = 01H,02H,03H,04H,05H 06H,07H,08H F10CH F10DH F10EH
01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H 08H
8 bytes
Figure 19-5 Password Comparison 19.10.1Password String
The password string transmitted from the external controller is compared with the specified data in the flash memory. When the password string is not matched to the data in the flash memory, the device enters the halt condition due to the password error.
19.10.2Handling of Password Error
If a password error occurs, the device enters the halt condition. In this case, reset the device to reactivate the serial PROM mode.
19.10.3Password Management during Program Development
If a program is modified many times in the development stage, confusion may arise as to the password. Therefore, it is recommended to use a fixed password in the program development stage. Example :Specify PNSA to F000H, and the password string to 8 bytes from address F001H (PCSA becomes F001H.)
Password Section code abs = 0F000H DB DB 08H "CODE1234" : PNSA definition : Password string definition
Page 219
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.11 Product ID Code TMP86FS23UG
19.11Product ID Code
The product ID code is the 13-byte data containing the start address and the end address of ROM. Table 19-17 shows the product ID code format. Table 19-17 Product ID Code Format
Data 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th Description Start Mark (3AH) The number of transfer data (10 bytes from 3rd to 12th byte) Address length (2 bytes) Reserved data Reserved data Reserved data Reserved data ROM block count The first address of ROM (Upper byte) The first address of ROM (Lower byte) The end address of ROM (Upper byte) The end address of ROM (Lower byte) Checksum of the transferred data (2's compliment for the sum of 3rd through 12th bytes) In the Case of TMP86FS23UG 3AH 0AH 02H 1DH 00H 00H 00H 01H 10H 00H FFH FFH D2H
19.12Flash Memory Status Code
The flash memory status code is the 7-byte data including the read protection status and the status of the data from FFE0H to FFFFH. Table 19-18 shows the flash memory status code. Table 19-18 Flash Memory Status Code
Data 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th Description Start mark Transferred data count (3rd through 6th byte) Status code Reserved data Reserved data Reserved data 3rd byte 00H 01H 02H 03H In the Case of TMP86FS23UG 3AH 04H 00H to 03H (See figure below) 00H 00H 00H checksum 00H FFH FEH FDH
7th
Checksum of the transferred data (2's compliment for the sum of 3rd through 6th data)
Status Code 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RPENA 0 BLANK (Initial Value: 0000 00**)
Page 220
TMP86FS23UG
RPENA BLANK
Flash memory read protection status The status from FFE0H to FFFFH.
0: 1: 0: 1:
Read protection is disabled. Read protection is enabled. All data is FFH in the area from FFE0H to FFFFH. The value except FFH is included in the area from FFE0H to FFFFH.
Some operation commands are limited by the flash memory status code 1. If the read protection is enabled, flash memory writing mode command and RAM loader mode command can not be executed. Erase all flash memory before executing these command.
Flash Memory Erasing Mode Chip Erase m Pass m Pass x x Sector Erase
RPENA
BLANK
Flash Memory Writing Mode
RAM Loader Mode
Flash memory SUM Output Mode
Product ID Code Output Mode
Flash Memory Status Output Mode
Read Protection Setting Mode
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
m Pass x x
m Pass x x
m m m m
m m m m
m m m m
x Pass x Pass
Note: m: The command can be executed. Pass: The command can be executed with a password. x: The command can not be executed. (After echoing the command back to the external controller, TMP86FS23UG stops UART communication and enters the halt condition.)
Page 221
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.13 Specifying the Erasure Area TMP86FS23UG
19.13Specifying the Erasure Area
In the flash memory erasing mode, the erasure area of the flash memory is specified by n-2 byte data. The start address of an erasure area is specified by ERASTA, and the end address is specified by ERAEND. If ERASTA is equal to or smaller than ERAEND, the sector erase (erasure in 4 kbyte units) is executed. Executing the sector erase while the read protection is enabled results in an infinite loop. If ERASTA is larger than ERAEND, the chip erase (erasure of an entire flash memory area) is executed and the read protection is disabled. Therefore, execute the chip erase (not sector erase) to disable the read protection. Erasure Area Specification Data (n-2 byte data)
7 6 ERASTA 5 4 3 2 ERAEND 1 0
ERASTA
The start address of the erasure area
0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111: 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111:
from 0000H from 1000H from 2000H from 3000H from 4000H from 5000H from 6000H from 7000H from 8000H from 9000H from A000H from B000H from C000H from D000H from E000H from F000H to 0FFFH to 1FFFH to 2FFFH to 3FFFH to 4FFFH to 5FFFH to 6FFFH to 7FFFH to 8FFFH to 9FFFH to AFFFH to BFFFH to CFFFH to DFFFH to EFFFH to FFFFH
ERAEND
The end address of the erasure area
Note: When the sector erase is executed for the area containing no flash cell, TMP86FS23UG stops the UART communication and enters the halt condition.
19.14Port Input Control Register
In the serial PROM mode, the input level is fixed to the all ports except P11 and P10 ports with a hardware feature to prevent overlap current to unused ports. (All port inputs and peripheral function inputs shared with the ports become invalid.) Therefore, to access to the flash memory in the RAM loader mode without UART communication, port inputs must be valid. To make port inputs valid, set the pin of the port input control register (SPCR) to "1". The SPCR register is not operated in the MCU mode.
Page 222
TMP86FS23UG
Port Input Control Register
SPCR (0FEAH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PIN (Initial value: **** ***0)
PIN
Port input control in the serial PROM mode
0 : Invalid port inputs (The input level is fixed with a hardware feature.) 1 : Valid port inputs
R/W
Note 1: The SPCR register can be read or written only in the serial PROM mode. When the write instruction is executed to the SPCR register in the MCU mode, the port input control can not be performed. When the read instruction is executed for the SPCR register in the MCU mode, read data of bit7 to 1 are unstable. Note 2: All I/O ports except P11 and P10 ports are controlled by the SPCR register.
Page 223
19.15 Flowchart
19. Serial PROM Mode
START
19.15Flowchart
Modify the baud rate based on the receive data
Setup
Receive UART data
Receive UART data
Receive data = 5AH
Transmit UART data (Transmit data = 60H) Transmit UART data (Transmit data = C0H) Transmit UART data (Transmit data = FAH) Transmit UART data (Transmit data = C3H) Transmit UART data (Transmit data = F0H)
No
Receive data = 30H (Flash memory writing mode) Receive data = 60H (RAM loader mode) Receive data = FAH (Read protection setting mode)
Receive data = 90H (Flash memory sum output mode) Receive data = C0H (Product ID code output mode) Receive data = C3H (Flash memory status output mode) Receive data = F0H (Flash memory erasing mode)
Adjust the baud rate (Adjust the source clock to 9600 bps)
Transmit UART data (Transmit data = 30H)
Transmit UART data (Transmit data = 90H)
Yes Read protection check Protection disabled
Blank product check Blank product check
Read protection check Protection Enable
Blank product check
Read protection check
Blank product check
Protection disabled
Transmit UART data (Transmit data = 5AH)
Protection Enable
Blank product
Non-blank product
Blank product check
NG
Verify the password (Compare the receive data and flash memory data)
Receive UART data
NG NG
Page 224
Blank Non-blank product product Non-blank product Blank product
Verify the password (Compare the receive data and flash memory data) Verify the password (Compare the receive data and flash memory data)
Blank Non-blank product product
OK
Infinite loop
NG
Transmit UART data (Echo back the baud rate modification data)
Verify the password (Compare the receive data and flash memory data)
Receive UART data
Infinite loop Upper 4 bits < Lower 4 bits Receive data
Infinite loop OK OK
Infinite loop
OK
Receive UART data (Intel Hex format) RAM write process
Receive UART data (Intel Hex format)
Read protection setting
Upper 4 bits > Lower 4 bits
Read protection check Protection disabled Protection enabled
Flash memory write process
Chip erase (Erase on entire area) Transmit UART data (Checksum) Disable read protection
Sector erase (Block erase) Upper 4 bits x 1000H to Lower 4 bits x 1000H
Infinite loop
Transmit UART data
Jump to the start address of RAM program
Transmit UART data
(Checksum of an entire area)
(Checksum of an entire area)
Transmit UART data (Product ID code)
Transmit UART data (Transmit data = FBH)
Transmit UART data (Status of the read protection and blank product)
Transmit UART data (Checksum of an entire area)
Transmit UART data (Checksum of the erased area)
TMP86FS23UG
TMP86FS23UG
19.16UART Timing
Table 19-19 UART Timing-1 (VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, fc = 2 to 16 MHz, Topr = -10 to 40C)
Minimum Required Time Parameter Time from matching data reception to the echo back Time from baud rate modification data reception to the echo back Time from operation command reception to the echo back Checksum calculation time Erasure time of an entire flash memory Erasure time for a sector of a flash memory (in 4-kbyte units) Symbol CMeb1 CMeb2 CMeb3 CKsm CEall CEsec Clock Frequency (fc) At fc = 2 MHz Approx. 930 Approx. 980 Approx. 800 Approx. 7864500 465 s 490 s 400 s 3.93 s 30 ms 15 ms At fc = 16 MHz 58.1 s 61.3 s 50 s 491.5 s 30 ms 15 ms
Table 19-20 UART Timing-2 (VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, fc = 2 to 16 MHz, Topr = -10 to 40C)
Minimum Required Time Parameter Time from the reset release to the acceptance of start bit of RXD pin Matching data transmission interval Time from the echo back of matching data to the acceptance of baud rate modification data Time from the echo back of baud rate modification data to the acceptance of an operation command Time from the echo back of operation command to the acceptance of password count storage addresses (Upper byte) Symbol RXsup CMtr1 CMtr2 Clock Frequency (fc) At fc = 2 MHz 2100 28500 380 1.05 ms 14.2 ms 190 s At fc = 16 MHz 131.3 ms 1.78 ms 23.8 s
CMtr3
650
325 s
40.6 s
CMtr4
800
400 s
50 s
RXsup RESET pin (5AH) RXD pin (5AH) TXD pin CMeb1 (5AH) RXD pin TXD pin CMtr1
CMtr2
CMtr3
CMtr4
(28H)
(30H)
(28H)
(30H)
CMeb2 (5AH) (5AH)
CMeb3
Page 225
19. Serial PROM Mode
19.16 UART Timing TMP86FS23UG
Page 226
TMP86FS23UG
20. Input/Output Circuitry
20.1 Control Pins
The input/output circuitries of the TMP86FS23UG control pins are shown below.
Control Pin I/O Input/Output Circuitry Remarks
Osc. enable
fc VDD RO
Resonator connecting pins (high-frequency) Rf = 1.2 M (typ.) RO = 0.5 k (typ.)
VDD
XIN XOUT Input Output
Rf
XIN
XOUT
Osc. enable
XTEN fs VDD RO
Resonator connecting pins (Low-frequency) Rf = 6 M (typ.) RO = 220 k (typ.)
XTIN XTOUT
Input Output
VDD
Rf
XTIN
XTOUT
VDD RIN
RESET
Input
Address-trap-reset Watchdog-timer System-clock-reset
Hysteresis input Pull-up resistor RIN = 220 k (typ.)
VDD
TEST Input
R
D1
Without pull-down resistor R = 1 k (typ.) Fix the TEST pin at low-level in MCU mode.
Note: The TEST pin of the TMP86FS23 does not have a pull-down resistor. Fix the TEST pin at low-level in MCU mode.
Page 227
20. Input/Output Circuitry
20.2 Input/Output Ports TMP86FS23UG
20.2 Input/Output Ports
Port I/O
Initial "High-Z"
Input/Output Circuitry
SEG output VDD Data output
Remarks
P1
I/O
Disable R
Tri-state I/O Hysteresis input R = 100 (typ.) LCD segment output
Pin input
Initial "High-Z"
SEG output VDD
P5 P7 P8
Data output
I/O
Disable R
Tri-state I/O R = 100 (typ.) LCD segment output
Pin input
Initial "High-Z"
VDD
P2
I/O
Data output Input from output latch Pin input R
Sink open drain output Hysteresis input R = 100 (typ.)
Initial "High-Z"
VDD
Pch control Data output
P34 to P30
I/O
Input from output latch R
Sink open drain output or C-MOS output Hysteresis input High current output (Nch) (Only P33, P34 port) R = 100 (typ.)
Pin input
Initial "High-Z"
P37 to P35
Output
Data output Input from output latch
Sink open drain output High current output (Nch)
Initial "High-Z"
AIN VDD
Data output
P6
I/O
Disable R
Tri-state I/O Hysteresis input AIN input R = 100 (typ.)
Pin input
Page 228
TMP86FS23UG
21. Electrical Characteristics
21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
The absolute maximum ratings are rated values which must not be exceeded during operation, even for an instant. Any one of the ratings must not be exceeded. If any absolute maximum rating is exceeded, a device may break down or its performance may be degraded, causing it to catch fire or explode resulting in injury to the user. Thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that no absolute maximum rating value will ever be exceeded.
(VSS = 0 V) Parameter Supply voltage Input voltage Output voltage Symbol VDD VIN VOUT IOUT1 Output current (Per 1 pin) IOUT2 IOUT3 IOUT1 Output current (Total) IOUT2 IOUT3 Power dissipation [Topr = 85C] Soldering temperature (Time) Storage temperature Operating temperature PD Tsld Tstg Topr P1, P30 to P34, P5, P6, P7, P8 port P1, P2, P30 to P32, P5, P6, P7, P8 port P33 to P37 port P1, P30 to P34, P5, P6, P7, P8 port P1, P2, P30 to P32, P5, P6, P7, P8 port P33 to P37 port Pins Ratings -0.3 to 6.5 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -1.8 3.2 30 -30 60 80 350 260 (10 s) -55 to 125 -40 to 85 C mW mA V Unit
Page 229
21. Electrical Characteristics
21.2 Recommended Operating Condition TMP86FS23UG
21.2 Recommended Operating Condition
The recommended operating conditions for a device are operating conditions under which it can be guaranteed that the device will operate as specified. If the device is used under operating conditions other than the recommended operating conditions (supply voltage, operating temperature range, specified AC/DC values etc.), malfunction may occur. Thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that the recommended operating conditions for the device are always adhered to.
21.2.1 When Programming Flash memory in MCU mode
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -10 to 40C) Parameter Supply voltage Input high level Symbol VDD VIH1 VIH2 VIL1 VIL2 fc Except hysteresis input Hysteresis input Except hysteresis input Hysteresis input XIN, XOUT Pins Ratings NORMAL1, 2 modes VDD 4.5 V Min 4.5 VDD x 0.70 VDD x 0.75 0 1.0 Max 5.5 VDD VDD x 0.30 VDD x 0.25 16.0 MHz Unit
V
Input low level Clock frequency
VDD 4.5 V
21.2.2 When Not Programming Flash Memory in MCU Mode
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Pins fc = 16 MHz fc = 8 MHz fs = 32.768 kHz STOP mode VIH1 Input high level VIH2 VIH3 VIL1 Input low level VIL2 VIL3 fc fs XIN, XOUT XTIN, XTOUT Except hysteresis input Hysteresis input Except hysteresis input Hysteresis input VDD 4.5 V VDD < 4.5 V VDD 4.5 V VDD < 4.5 V VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 1.0 30.0 VDD x 0.70 VDD x 0.75 VDD x 0.90 VDD x 0.30 0 VDD x 0.25 VDD x 0.10 8.0 16.0 34.0 MHz kHz VDD V Ratings NORMAL1, 2 modes IDLE0, 1, 2 modes NORMAL1, 2 modes IDLE0, 1, 2 modes SLOW1, 2 modes SLEEP0, 1, 2 modes 2.7 (Note1) Min 3.5 Max Unit
Supply voltage
VDD
5.5
Clock frequency
Note: When the supply voltage VDD is less than 3.0 V, the operating temperature Topr must be in a range of -20 to 85 C.
Page 230
TMP86FS23UG
21.2.3 Serial PROM mode
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -10 to 40 C) Parameter Supply voltage Input high voltage Symbol VDD VIH1 VIH2 VIL1 VIL2 fc Except hysteresis input Hysteresis input Except hysteresis input Hysteresis input XIN, XOUT Pins Condition NORMAL1, 2 modes VDD 4.5 V Min 4.5 VDD x 0.70 VDD x 0.75 0 2.0 Max 5.5 VDD VDD x 0.30 VDD x 0.25 16.0 MHz Unit
V
Input low voltage Clock frequency
VDD 4.5 V
Page 231
21. Electrical Characteristics
21.3 DC Characteristics TMP86FS23UG
21.3 DC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85 C) Parameter Hysteresis voltage Symbol VHS IIN1 Input current IIN2 IIN3 Input resistance Output leakage current Output high voltage Output low voltage Output low current RIN2 ILO VOH VOL IOL Pins Hysteresis input TEST Sink open drain, Tri-state
RESET, STOP RESET pull-up
Condition
Min -
Typ. 0.9
Max -
Unit V
VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 5.5 V/0 V
-
-
2
A
100 VDD = 5.5 V, VOUT = 5.5 V/0 V VDD = 4.5 V, IOH = -0.7 mA VDD = 4.5 V, IOL = 1.6 mA VDD = 4.5 V, VOL = 1.0 V When a program operates on flash memory (Note10,11) - 4.1 - -
220 - - - 20
450 2 - 0.4 -
k A V
Sink open drain, Tri-state C-MOS, Tri-state port Except XOUT and P3 port High current port (P33 to P37 port)
mA
Supply current in NORMAL1, 2 modes Supply current in IDLE0, 1, 2 modes
VDD = 5.5 V VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V fc = 16 MHz fs = 32.768 kHz
-
12.6
20 mA
- When a program operates on flash memory (Note10,11)
6
10
Supply current in SLOW1 mode
-
40
260
IDD VDD = 3.0 V VIN = 2.8 V/0.2 V fs = 32.768 kHz
When a program operates on RAM
- - -
18 10 8
25 A 18 16
Supply current in SLEEP1 mode Supply current in SLEEP0 mode Supply current in STOP mode Segment output low resistance Common output low resistance Segment output high resistance Common output high resistance Segment/common output voltage ROS1 ROC1 ROS2 ROC2 VO2/3 VO1/2 VO1/3 SEG/COM pin SEG pin COM pin SEG pin COM pin
VDD = 5.5 V VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V
-
0.5
10
-
20 20
-
k 200 200 3.8 VDD = 5.0 V VLC = 2.0 V 3.3 2.8 - 4.2 3.7 3.2 V
Note 1: Typical values show those at Topr = 25C, VDD = 5 V Note 2: Input current (IIN1, IIN2); The current through pull-up or pull-down resistor is not included. Note 3: IDD does not include IREF current. Note 4: The supply currents of SLOW 2 and SLEEP 2 modes are equivalent to IDLE 0, 1, 2. Note 5: Output resistors ROS and ROC indicate "ON" when switching levels. Note 6: VO2/3 indicates the output voltage at the 2/3 level when operating in the 1/4 or 1/3 duty mode. Note 7: VO1/2 indicates the output voltage at the 1/2 level when operating in the 1/2 duty or static mode. Note 8: VO1/3 indicates the output voltage at the 1/3 level when operating in the 1/4 or 1/3 duty mode. Note 9: When using LCD, it is necessary to consider values of ROS1/2 and ROC1/2. Note 10:When a program is executing in the flash memory or when data is being read from the flash memory, the flash memory operates in an intermittent manner, causing peak currents in the operation current, as shown in Figure 21-1.
Page 232
TMP86FS23UG
In this case, the supply current IDD (in NORMAL1, NORMAL2 and SLOW1 modes) is defined as the sum of the average peak current and MCU current. Note 11:When designing the power supply, make sure that peak currents can be supplied. In SLOW1 mode, the difference between the peak current and the average current becomes large.
1 machine cycle (4/fc or 4/fs) Program coutner (PC) I DDP-P
[mA]
n
n+1
n+2
n+3 Momentary flash current Sum of average momentary flash current and MCU current
Max. current Typ. current MCU current
Figure 21-1 Intermittent Operation of Flash Memory
Page 233
21. Electrical Characteristics
21.4 AD Conversion Characteristics TMP86FS23UG
21.4 AD Conversion Characteristics
(VSS = 0.0 V, 4.5 V VDD 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Analog reference voltage Power supply voltage of analog control circuit (Note 5) Analog reference voltage range (Note 4) Analog input voltage Power supply current of analog reference voltage Non linearity error Zero point error Full scale error Total error VDD = AVDD = 5.0 V VSS = 0.0 V VAREF = 5.0 V Symbol VAREF AVDD VAREF VAIN IREF VDD = AVDD = VAREF = 5.5 V VSS = 0.0 V 3.5 VSS - - - - - Condition Min AVDD - 1.0 Typ. - VDD - - 0.6 - - - - - VAREF 1.0 2 2 2 2 LSB mA Max AVDD Unit
V
(VSS = 0.0 V, 2.7 V VDD < 4.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Analog reference voltage Power supply voltage of analog control circuit (Note 5) Analog reference voltage range (Note 4) Analog input voltage Power supply current of analog reference voltage Non linearity error Zero point error Full scale error Total error VDD = AVDD = 2.7 V VSS = 0.0 V VAREF = 2.7 V Symbol VAREF AVDD VAREF VAIN IREF VDD = AVDD = VAREF = 4.5 V VSS = 0.0 V 2.5 VSS - - - - - Condition Min AVDD - 1.0 Typ. - VDD - - 0.5 - - - - - VAREF 0.8 2 2 2 2 LSB mA Max AVDD Unit
V
Note 1: The total error includes all errors except a quantization error, and is defined as a maximum deviation from the ideal conversion line. Note 2: Conversion time is different in recommended value by power supply voltage. About conversion time, please refer to "Register Framing". Note 3: Please use input voltage to AIN input Pin in limit of VAREF to VSS. When voltage of range outside is input, conversion value becomes unsettled and gives affect to other channel conversion value. Note 4: Analog reference voltage range: VAREF = VAREF - VSS Note 5: The AVDD pin should be fixed on the VDD level even though AD converter is not used. Note 6: When the supply voltage VDD is less than 3.0 V, the operating temperature Topr must be in a range of -20 to 85 C.
Page 234
TMP86FS23UG
21.5 AC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode Machine cycle time tcy IDLE1, 2 mode SLOW1, 2 mode SLEEP1, 2 mode High level clock pulse width Low level clock pulse width High level clock pulse width Low level clock pulse width tWCH tWCL tWCH tWCL For external clock operation (XIN input) fc = 16 MHz For external clock operation (XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.25 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
31.25
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
(VSS = 0 V, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode Machine cycle time tcy IDLE1, 2 mode SLOW1, 2 mode SLEEP1, 2 mode High level clock pulse width Low level clock pulse width High level clock pulse width Low level clock pulse width tWCH tWCL tWCH tWCL For external clock operation (XIN input) fc = 8 MHz For external clock operation (XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.5 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
62.5
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
Note: When the supply voltage VDD is less than 3.0 V, the operating temperature Topr must be in a range of -20 to 85 C.
21.6 Timer Counter 1 input (ECIN) Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Condition Frequency measurement mode VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V Frequency measurement mode VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V Single edge count Both edge count Single edge count Both edge count Min - - - - Typ. - - - - Max 16 MHz 8 Unit
TC1 input (ECIN input)
tTC1
21.7 Flash Characteristics
21.7.1 Write/Retention Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V) Paramete Number of guaranteed writes to flash memory Condition VSS = 0 V, Topr = -10 to 40C Min - Max. - Typ. 100 Unit Times
Page 235
21. Electrical Characteristics
21.8 Recommended Oscillating Conditions TMP86FS23UG
21.8 Recommended Oscillating Conditions
XIN XOUT XTIN XTOUT
C1
C2
C1
C2
(1) High-frequency Oscillation
(2) Low-frequency Oscillation
Note 1: To ensure stable oscillation, the resonator position, load capacitance, etc. must be appropriate. Because these factors are greatly affected by board patterns, please be sure to evaluate operation on the board on which the device will actually be mounted. Note 2: For the resonators to be used with Toshiba microcontrollers, we recommend ceramic resonators manufactured by Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. For details, please visit the website of Murata at the following URL: http://www.murata.com
21.9 Handling Precaution
- The solderability test conditions for lead-free products (indicated by the suffix G in product name) are shown below. 1. When using the Sn-37Pb solder bath Solder bath temperature = 230 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used 2. When using the Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu solder bath Solder bath temperature = 245 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used Note: The pass criteron of the above test is as follows: Solderability rate until forming 95 % - When using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition.
Page 236
TMP86FS23UG
22. Package Dimension
P-LQFP64-1010-0.50D
Unit: mm
Page 237
22. Package Dimension
TMP86FS23UG
Page 238
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI). Toshiba provides a variety of development tools and basic software to enable efficient software development. These development tools have specifications that support advances in microcomputer hardware (LSI) and can be used extensively. Both the hardware and software are supported continuously with version updates. The recent advances in CMOS LSI production technology have been phenomenal and microcomputer systems for LSI design are constantly being improved. The products described in this document may also be revised in the future. Be sure to check the latest specifications before using. Toshiba is developing highly integrated, high-performance microcomputers using advanced MOS production technology and especially well proven CMOS technology. We are prepared to meet the requests for custom packaging for a variety of application areas. We are confident that our products can satisfy your application needs now and in the future.


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of TMP86FS23UG

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  

[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]


 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X